WO2024000983A1 - 冰箱 - Google Patents

冰箱 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024000983A1
WO2024000983A1 PCT/CN2022/129650 CN2022129650W WO2024000983A1 WO 2024000983 A1 WO2024000983 A1 WO 2024000983A1 CN 2022129650 W CN2022129650 W CN 2022129650W WO 2024000983 A1 WO2024000983 A1 WO 2024000983A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
door
door body
angle
side wall
track groove
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/129650
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
杨春
郭动
张向平
付婧
赵振雷
刘铁伟
王海燕
张维伦
常雪松
张建
Original Assignee
海信冰箱有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 海信冰箱有限公司 filed Critical 海信冰箱有限公司
Publication of WO2024000983A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024000983A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D11/00—Self-contained movable devices, e.g. domestic refrigerators
    • F25D11/02—Self-contained movable devices, e.g. domestic refrigerators with cooling compartments at different temperatures
    • E—FIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05—LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05D—HINGES OR SUSPENSION DEVICES FOR DOORS, WINDOWS OR WINGS
    • E05D3/00—Hinges with pins
    • E05D3/06—Hinges with pins with two or more pins
    • E05D3/18—Hinges with pins with two or more pins with sliding pins or guides
    • E—FIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05—LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05D—HINGES OR SUSPENSION DEVICES FOR DOORS, WINDOWS OR WINGS
    • E05D11/00—Additional features or accessories of hinges
    • E05D11/06—Devices for limiting the opening movement of hinges
    • E—FIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05—LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05D—HINGES OR SUSPENSION DEVICES FOR DOORS, WINDOWS OR WINGS
    • E05D7/00—Hinges or pivots of special construction
    • E05D7/08—Hinges or pivots of special construction for use in suspensions comprising two spigots placed at opposite edges of the wing, especially at the top and the bottom, e.g. trunnions
    • E05D7/081—Hinges or pivots of special construction for use in suspensions comprising two spigots placed at opposite edges of the wing, especially at the top and the bottom, e.g. trunnions the pivot axis of the wing being situated near one edge of the wing, especially at the top and bottom, e.g. trunnions
    • F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D23/00—General constructional features
    • F25D23/02—Doors; Covers
    • F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D23/00—General constructional features
    • F25D23/02—Doors; Covers
    • F25D23/028—Details
    • E—FIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05—LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05Y—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES E05D AND E05F, RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS, ELECTRIC CONTROL, POWER SUPPLY, POWER SIGNAL OR TRANSMISSION, USER INTERFACES, MOUNTING OR COUPLING, DETAILS, ACCESSORIES, AUXILIARY OPERATIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, APPLICATION THEREOF
    • E05Y2900/00—Application of doors, windows, wings or fittings thereof
    • E05Y2900/30—Application of doors, windows, wings or fittings thereof for domestic appliances
    • E05Y2900/31—Application of doors, windows, wings or fittings thereof for domestic appliances for refrigerators
    • F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D2323/00—General constructional features not provided for in other groups of this subclass
    • F25D2323/02—Details of doors or covers not otherwise covered
    • F25D2323/021—French doors
    • F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D2323/00—General constructional features not provided for in other groups of this subclass
    • F25D2323/02—Details of doors or covers not otherwise covered
    • F25D2323/024—Door hinges
    • F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D2323/00—General constructional features not provided for in other groups of this subclass
    • F25D2323/06—Details of walls not otherwise covered

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to the technical field of household appliances, and in particular to a refrigerator.
  • refrigerators In family life, refrigerators have become one of the essential appliances in every family. Due to the demand for indoor beauty and simplicity, more and more consumers are choosing built-in refrigerators.
  • a built-in refrigerator is a refrigerator that is embedded into its matching cabinet, and a heat dissipation cycle is formed through the feet, back plate and top plate. Therefore, a small gap can be left between the left and right side walls of the refrigerator and the inner wall of the cabinet.
  • a refrigerator including a box body, a hinge assembly and a door body.
  • the box body includes a first body side wall and a second body side wall arranged oppositely.
  • the plane where the first body side wall is located is defined as a reference plane, the side of the reference plane close to the box is the inside, and the side of the reference plane away from the box is the outside.
  • the hinge component is connected to the box body and is close to the first body side wall.
  • the hinge assembly includes a first track groove, a second track groove, a first hinge axis and a second hinge axis.
  • the first track groove and the second track groove are provided at the end of the door body close to the hinge assembly.
  • the first hinge axis cooperates with the first track groove and is movable relative to the first track groove.
  • the second hinge axis cooperates with the second track groove and is movable relative to the second track groove.
  • the door body is connected to the box body through the hinge assembly to open or close the box body.
  • the door body includes a door front wall and a door side wall.
  • the door front wall is a side wall of the door body away from the box body.
  • the door side wall is a side wall of the door body close to the hinge assembly.
  • the first hinge axis moves in a straight line toward the door side wall relative to the first track groove, and when the door The movement direction is changed when the body is opened to the second angle, and the second hinge moves axially in a direction close to the door side wall and away from the door front wall.
  • the first hinge axis moves along the first track groove in a direction close to the door front wall and close to the door side wall. , so that the door body moves toward the inside during rotation.
  • the fifth angle is greater than the second angle, and the second angle is greater than 0°.
  • Figure 1 is a perspective view of a refrigerator according to some embodiments.
  • Figure 2 is a top view according to some embodiments.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a hinge assembly of a refrigerator according to some embodiments.
  • Figure 4 is an exploded view of the hinge assembly in the upper right corner of the refrigerator according to some embodiments.
  • Figure 5 is a structural diagram of the hinge assembly of the refrigerator according to some embodiments when the door body is in a closed state in Embodiment 1;
  • Figure 6 shows a refrigerator according to some embodiments.
  • the door body is opened to Structural diagram of the hinge assembly;
  • Figure 7 shows a refrigerator according to some embodiments.
  • the door body is opened to Structural diagram of the hinge assembly;
  • Figure 8 shows a refrigerator according to some embodiments.
  • the door body is opened to Structural diagram of the hinge assembly;
  • Figure 9 shows a refrigerator according to some embodiments.
  • the door body is opened to Structural diagram of the hinge assembly;
  • Figure 10 shows a refrigerator according to some embodiments.
  • the door body is opened to Structural diagram of hinge assembly chain;
  • Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the movement trajectory of the first side edge W and the second side edge N relative to the hinge assembly in Example 1 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of the movement of the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove in Embodiment 1 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 13 shows the door body of the refrigerator in Embodiment 1 when it is opened to A schematic diagram of the positions of the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove;
  • Figure 14 shows the door body of the refrigerator in Embodiment 1 when it is opened to A schematic diagram of the positions of the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove;
  • Figure 15 shows the door body of the refrigerator in Embodiment 1 when it is opened to A schematic diagram of the positions of the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove;
  • Figure 16 shows the door body of the refrigerator in Embodiment 1 when it is opened to A schematic diagram of the positions of the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove;
  • Figure 17 shows the door body of the refrigerator in Embodiment 1 when it is opened to A schematic diagram of the positions of the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove;
  • Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of the cooperation relationship between the first hinge axis and the first track groove in Embodiment 1 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of the cooperation relationship between the second hinge axis and the first track groove in Embodiment 1 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 20 is a partial view of the door in a closed state in Example 1 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments.
  • Figure 21 is a partial view of the door of the refrigerator in Embodiment 1 when it is opened to the first opening angle s according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 22 is a partial view of an embodiment of a refrigerator when the door is opened to a third opening angle t according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 23 is a partial view of an embodiment of the refrigerator when the door is opened to the maximum angle according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 24 is a schematic diagram of the movement of rollers along a convex curve in Example 2 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the position of the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove when the door body is closed in Embodiment 3 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 26 is a schematic diagram of the movement of the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove in Embodiment 3 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 27 shows the door body in the third embodiment of the refrigerator according to some embodiments. Schematic diagram of the positions of the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove during the closing process;
  • Figure 28 is a schematic diagram of the relative position of the flip beam and the box when the door is opened in Embodiment 4 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 29 is a schematic diagram of the relative position of the flip beam and the box from another perspective when the door is opened in Embodiment 4 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 30 is a schematic diagram of the positional relationship between the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove when the door body is closed in Embodiment 5 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 31 is a schematic diagram of the positional relationship between the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove when the door body squeezes the door seal in Embodiment 5 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 32 is a schematic diagram of the positional relationship between the first hinge axis relative to the first track groove and the second hinge axis relative to the second track groove when the door body continues to move in the closing direction from the closed state in Embodiment 5 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments. ;
  • Figure 33 is an exploded view of the upper end of the door body and the mounting block in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 34 is another exploded view of the upper end of the door body and the mounting block in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 35 is an exploded view of the lower end of the door body and the mounting block in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 36 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the lower end of the door body and the mounting block in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 37 is a perspective view of the hinge plate and the locking structure in a closed state of the refrigerator in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 38 is a structural diagram of the cooperation between the hinge plate and the locking structure when the door body is in a closed state in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 39 is a perspective view of the hinge plate and locking structure when the door body is opened in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 40 is a structural diagram of the hinge plate and locking structure when the door body is opened in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 41 is a perspective view of the hinge plate and locking structure when the door body is opened to 90° in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 42 is a structural diagram of the hinge plate and locking structure when the door body is opened to 90° in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 43 is a perspective view of the hinge plate and locking structure when the door body is opened to the maximum angle in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 44 is a structural diagram of the hinge plate and locking structure when the door body is opened to the maximum angle in Embodiment 6 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 45 is a schematic diagram of the relative positions of the first hinge axis in contact with the first track groove and the second hinge axis in contact with the second track groove when the door body is opened to the maximum angle in Embodiment 7 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 46 is a structural diagram of the first hinge axis in contact with the first track groove and the second hinge axis in contact with the second track groove when the door body is opened to the maximum angle in Embodiment 7 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 47 is an exploded view of the upper end of the door body and the mounting block in the ninth embodiment of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 48 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the upper end of the door body and the mounting block in the ninth embodiment of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 49 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the upper end of the door body and the mounting block in the ninth embodiment of the refrigerator according to some embodiments from another perspective;
  • Figure 50 is an exploded view of the upper end of the door body and the mounting block in the ninth embodiment of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 51 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the lower end of the door body, the track block, and the locking block in the ninth embodiment of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 52 is a structural diagram of the lower end of the door body, the track block, and the locking block when the door body is closed to G B1 in Embodiment 10 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 53 is a schematic diagram of the relative positions of the door body, the guide block and the guide groove when the door body is closed to GS in Embodiment 10 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 54 is a schematic diagram of the relative positions of the door body, the guide block and the guide groove when the door body is closed to GF in Embodiment 10 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 55 is an explanatory diagram of the state of the lock hook, the stopper, the guide block and the guide groove when G B1 > G S in the tenth embodiment of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 56 is an explanatory diagram of the state of the lock hook, the stopper, the guide block and the guide groove when G B1 ⁇ G F in Embodiment 10 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 58 is a schematic structural diagram of the hinge when the door body is in a closed state in Embodiment 11 of the refrigerator according to some embodiments;
  • Figure 59 is a schematic structural view of the hinge of the refrigerator in Embodiment 11 according to some embodiments when the door is in a closed state and the first positioning point P 1 is located at the side of the angle bisecting plane H close to the door side wall;
  • FIG. 60 is a schematic structural diagram of the refrigerator in Embodiment 11 according to some embodiments, when the door is in a closed state and the first positioning point P 1 is located at the hinge on the side of the angle bisector H away from the door side wall.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present disclosure, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more.
  • connection should be understood in a broad sense.
  • connection can be a fixed connection, a detachable connection, or an integrated connection; it can be a direct connection or an indirect connection through an intermediate medium.
  • coupled indicates that two or more components are in direct physical or electrical contact.
  • coupled or “communicatively coupled” may also refer to two or more components that are not in direct contact with each other but still cooperate or interact with each other.
  • the embodiments disclosed herein are not necessarily limited by the content herein.
  • At least one of A, B and C has the same meaning as “at least one of A, B or C” and includes the following combinations of A, B and C: A only, B only, C only, A and B The combination of A and C, the combination of B and C, and the combination of A, B and C.
  • a and/or B includes the following three combinations: A only, B only, and a combination of A and B.
  • parallel includes absolutely parallel and approximately parallel, and the acceptable deviation range of approximately parallel may be, for example, a deviation within 5°;
  • perpendicular includes absolutely vertical and approximately vertical, and the acceptable deviation range of approximately vertical may also be, for example, Deviation within 5°.
  • equal includes absolute equality and approximate equality, wherein the difference between the two that may be equal within the acceptable deviation range of approximately equal is less than or equal to 5% of either one, for example.
  • the side facing the user when the refrigerator is in use is defined as the front side, and the opposite side is defined as the rear side.
  • Embodiment 1 of the present disclosure provides a refrigerator 1.
  • the refrigerator 1 includes a box 10 having a storage room, a door 30 connected to the box 10 to open and close the storage room, and supplying cold water to the storage room.
  • Air refrigeration device The box body 10 includes an inner pot defining a storage chamber, an outer shell connected to the outside of the inner pot to form the appearance of the refrigerator, and an insulation layer disposed between the inner pot and the outer shell to insulate the storage chamber.
  • the box 10 defines a plurality of storage compartments.
  • the plurality of storage compartments include a refrigerating compartment and a freezing compartment located below the refrigerating compartment. It should be noted that the types and arrangements of the plurality of storage compartments of the refrigerator 1 are not limited to these.
  • a access opening is formed at the front end of the storage room, through which the user can place food into the storage room or take out food from the storage room.
  • a rotatable door 30 is provided on the box 10 to open or close the access opening of the storage room.
  • the door body 30 is rotatably connected to the box body 10 by a hinge assembly located at the upper part of the refrigerator 1 and a hinge assembly located at the lower part of the refrigerator 1 .
  • the box 10 includes an oppositely arranged first body side wall (ie, one of the left side wall and the right side wall of the box 10 ) and a second body side wall (ie, one of the left side wall and the right side wall of the box 10 ). the other).
  • the hinge assembly is disposed on the box body 10 and close to the first body side wall.
  • the door body 30 has a door front wall 31 that is away from the box body 10 when the door body 30 is closed, a door rear wall 33 that is opposite to the door front wall 31 , and a door side wall 32 that is close to the hinge assembly and connected to the door front wall 31 .
  • the hinge assembly when the hinge assembly is located on the right side of the box 10 , the right side wall of the door body 30 is the door side wall 32 .
  • the left side wall of the door body 30 is the door side wall 32 .
  • the door front wall 31 and door side wall 32 of the door body 30 intersect to form a first side edge W, and the door side wall 32 intersects with the door rear wall 33 to form a second side edge N.
  • the first side edge W is located on the side of the second side edge N away from the box body 10 .
  • the intersection line of the plane where the door front wall 31 is located and the plane where the door side wall 32 is located is the theoretical first side edge W.
  • the arrangement of the rounded transition at the intersection of the door front wall 31 and the door side wall 32 forms a curved surface extending along the height direction of the door body 30 (i.e., the up and down direction as shown in Figure 1).
  • a straight line extending along the height direction of the door body 30 represents the first side edge W.
  • the intersection of the door rear wall 33 and the door side wall 32 is provided with a rounded corner transition.
  • the intersection line of the respective planes of the door rear wall 33 and the door side wall 32 can represent the second side edge N, or the position of the intersection line A straight line close to and parallel to the intersection line represents the second side edge N.
  • a door seal 5 is provided on the rear wall of the door 30.
  • the door seal 5 surrounds the access opening and fits the front end surface of the box 10 to effectively
  • the connection between the door 30 and the box 10 is sealed to ensure that the door 30 seals the access opening and prevents cold air from overflowing.
  • the door seal 5 is ring-shaped.
  • the hinge assembly includes a first hinge axis 41 (ie, a main hinge axis) and a second hinge axis 42 (ie, a auxiliary hinge axis) located on the side of the first hinge axis 41 away from the first body side wall.
  • a first track groove 50 and a second track groove 60 are provided at an end of the door body 30 close to the hinge assembly.
  • the first hinge axis 41 is adapted to the first track groove 50
  • the second hinge axis 42 is adapted to the second track groove 60.
  • the hinge assembly includes a hinge plate 40 fixedly connected to the box 10 .
  • the hinge plate 40 includes a connecting portion 401 connected to the box 10 , and a horizontal plate-shaped extension portion 402 extending forward from the connecting portion 401 .
  • the connecting part 401 may be connected to the box 10 through fasteners such as screws, pins, and bolts.
  • the hinge assembly located at the upper end of the door body 30, the hinge assembly includes a hinge plate 40 connected to the upper end of the box 10, and the first hinge axis 41 and the second hinge axis 42 are connected to the hinge plate 40.
  • the hinge plate 40, the first hinge shaft 41 and the second hinge shaft 42 may be integrally formed, or may be provided separately and assembled with each other.
  • the first hinge shaft 41 and the second hinge shaft 42 are provided on the extension portion 402 and extend vertically downward.
  • the connecting portion 401 is connected to the front end surface of the box body 10 .
  • the first hinge shaft 41 and the second hinge shaft 42 are provided on the hinge plate 40 and extend upward.
  • first track grooves 50 and second track grooves 60 are provided at both upper and lower ends of the door body 30 .
  • the two first track grooves 50 located at the upper and lower ends of the door body 30 have corresponding positions in the height direction of the refrigerator 1
  • the two second track grooves 60 have corresponding positions in the height direction of the refrigerator 1, so that The movement of the upper and lower ends of the door body 30 is kept consistent, so that the door body 30 can be opened or closed more smoothly.
  • the plane where the side wall of the box 10 close to the hinge plate 40 i.e., the first body side wall
  • the reference plane M 0 when the refrigerator 1 is stored in the cabinet 100 , define the side of the reference plane M 0 close to the cabinet 100 as the outside, and the opposite side close to the storage room as the inside.
  • the plane where the door front wall 31 is located is substantially flush with the plane where the front end surface of the cabinet 100 is located (that is, the distance between the two planes is less than 2 mm).
  • a gap ⁇ is usually reserved between the cabinet 100 and the first body side wall of the refrigerator 1 (ie, the reference plane M 0 ).
  • the first side edge W cannot exceed the reference plane M 0 by too much during the rotation of the door 30 to avoid the first side edge W from interfacing with the cabinet 100 Due to the collision, the door 30 cannot be opened normally.
  • the first side edge W will not exceed the reference plane M 0 by much.
  • the hinge plate 40 is provided on the right side of the door body 30 and the inner side is the left side of the reference plane M 0 , the door body 30 needs to move to the left during rotation.
  • the hinge plate 40 is disposed on the left side of the door body 30 and the inner side is the right side of the reference plane M 0 , the door body 30 needs to move to the right during rotation.
  • the first track groove 50 includes a connected linear groove segment and a curved groove segment, and the linear groove segment is located on the side of the curved groove segment away from the door side wall 32 .
  • the linear groove segment extends toward the door side wall 32 , one end of the curved groove segment is connected to the linear groove segment, and the other end of the curved groove segment extends toward the direction toward the first side edge W.
  • the curved groove section protrudes toward the direction of the first side wall N.
  • the distance between the curved groove section and the door side wall 32 gradually decreases. In this way, during the opening process of the door body 30, the door body 30 first moves inward and then moves forward while rotating, thereby preventing the door body 30 from interfering with the cabinet 100 and preventing the door body 30 from squeezing the door. Seal 5 to reduce the wear of door seal 5.
  • the linear groove section is parallel to the door front wall 31 .
  • the central trajectory line of the first trajectory groove 50 is denoted as the first trajectory line S, and the first trajectory groove 50 is defined by the shape of the first trajectory groove 50 .
  • the first trajectory line S includes a linear trajectory segment and a curved trajectory segment connected by smooth transition.
  • the linear track segment extends in a direction close to the door side wall 32
  • the curved track segment is located on a side of the linear track segment close to the door side wall 32 and protrudes in a direction close to the second side edge N.
  • the straight track segment is parallel to the door front wall 31 and the curved track segment is set as a right arc.
  • the second track groove 60 is a curved groove. One end of the second track groove 60 is further away from the door rear wall 33 and further away from the door side wall 32 than the other end of the second track groove 60 .
  • the second track groove 60 protrudes toward the door rear wall 33 .
  • the center trajectory line of the second trajectory groove 60 is denoted as the second trajectory line K.
  • the second trajectory line K is defined by the shape of the second trajectory groove 60 .
  • the second trajectory line K is curved and protrudes toward the door rear wall 33 .
  • the distance between the second trajectory line K and the door front wall 31 first increases and then decreases.
  • the first track groove 50 is located on the side of the second track groove 60 close to the door front wall 31 and the door side wall 32 , so that the door body 30 can move a certain distance to the inside while rotating, thereby rotating the door body 30
  • the resulting displacement of the first side edge W to the outside is compensated to reduce the distance of the first side edge W beyond the reference plane M 0 and avoid mutual interference between the first side edge W and the cabinet 100 when the door 30 is opened.
  • first track groove 50 and the first hinge shaft 41 are stationary reference objects, it is equivalent to the first hinge axis 41 moving in the first track groove 50 and the second hinge axis 42 moving in the second track groove 60 .
  • this disclosure uses the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 as stationary reference objects, and the first hinge axis 41 and the second hinge axis 42 move relative to the reference object for description.
  • the central axis of the first hinge axis 41 is denoted as the positioning central axis P
  • the central axis of the second hinge axis 42 is denoted as the guiding central axis Q; in the projection of the plane where the top wall of the box 10 is located, the line segment PQ is denoted is the axis segment PQ.
  • the movement of the first hinge shaft 41 along the first track groove 50 is equivalent to the movement of the positioning center axis P along the first track line S
  • the movement of the second hinge shaft 42 along the second track groove 60 is equivalent to the movement of the positioning center axis P along the first track line S.
  • the central axis Q moves along the second trajectory line K, so that the door body 30 can move a certain distance to the inside while rotating, thereby compensating for the displacement of the first side edge W to the outside caused by the rotation of the door body 30. This prevents the door 30 from interfering with the cabinet 100 when it is opened.
  • the movement of the door 30 relative to the box 10 is equivalent to moving in the plane where the top wall of the box 10 is located (or relative to the top wall of the box 10 ). (in parallel planes) relative motion between the two.
  • the movement of the axis segment PQ relative to the track groove provided on the door 30 is equivalent to the movement of the hinge plate 40 relative to the door 30 , and is also equivalent to the movement of the box 10 relative to the door 30 exercise.
  • the movement of the door 30 relative to the box 10 can be derived from the movement of the box 10 relative to the door 30 .
  • the movement of the axis segment PQ relative to the door 30 in the plane where the top wall of the box 10 is located is selected to represent the movement of the box 10 (hinge plate 30 ) relative to the door 30 .
  • the first trajectory S includes a first positioning point P 1 away from the door side wall 32 and a sixth positioning point P 6 close to the door side wall 32 .
  • the first trajectory line S first extends from the first positioning point P 1 along a straight line in a direction close to the door side wall 32 , and then extends along a curve to the sixth positioning point P 6 .
  • the first trajectory line S first extends from the first positioning point P 1 along a straight line in a direction close to the door side wall 32 , and then extends along a curve in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and the door front wall 31 to the sixth positioning point.
  • Click P 6 The distance between the first positioning point P 1 and the door front wall 31 is marked as D 1
  • the distance between the sixth positioning point P 6 and the door front wall 31 is marked as D 2
  • D 1 >D 2 .
  • the sixth positioning point P 6 is located on the side of the first positioning point P 1 close to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31 , that is, the first trajectory S first approaches the door in a straight line from the first positioning point P 1
  • the direction of the side wall 32 extends, and then extends along a curve in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31 to the sixth positioning point P 6 .
  • the first trajectory line S will first extend from the first positioning point P 1 along a straight line in a direction close to the door side wall 32 , and then extend along a curve in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and the door front wall 31 to the sixth position.
  • the anchor point P 6 is taken as an example for explanation.
  • the second trajectory line K includes a first guide point Q 1 away from the door side wall 32 and a sixth guide point Q 6 close to the door side wall 32 .
  • the sixth guide point Q 6 is located on the side of the first guide point Q 1 away from the door front wall 31 and close to the door side wall 32 .
  • the second trajectory line K moves from the first guide point Q 1 away from the door front wall 31 and close to the door side.
  • the direction of the wall 32 extends along a curve to the sixth guide point Q6 .
  • the distance between the first guide point Q 1 and the door front wall 31 is marked as Z 1
  • the distance between the sixth guide point Q 6 and the door front wall 31 is marked as Z 2 .
  • Z 1 ⁇ D 2 ⁇ D 1 ⁇ Z 2 The above arrangement allows the second track groove 60 to effectively limit the movement of the second hinge shaft 42 to drive the first hinge shaft 41 to move in the first track groove 50, thereby causing the door body 30 to move toward the door 30 during the opening process. Move a certain distance inward and ensure the stability of the door body 30 when it is rotated and opened.
  • the central axis (positioning central axis P) of the first hinge axis 41 is located at the first positioning point P 1 of the first trajectory line S, and the second The central axis (guide central axis Q) of the hinge shaft 42 is located at the first guide point Q 1 of the second trajectory line K. That is, when the door body 30 is in a closed state, the first hinge axis 41 is located on the side of the second hinge axis 42 close to the door side wall 32 and close to the door rear wall 33 .
  • the distance is less than 3mm.
  • L 1 is 2.5mm, 5mm, 7.5mm or 10mm
  • L 2 is 7.5mm, 15mm, 25mm or 30mm.
  • the maximum angle G max (that is, the fifth angle) when the refrigerator is opened is >90° as an example for explanation.
  • the positioning center axis P is located at the first positioning point P 1 of the first trajectory line S
  • the guiding center axis Q is located at the first guiding point Q 1 of the second trajectory line K.
  • any angle in the range of 0° to G 2 can represent that when the door 30 is opened to the interval (0°, G 2 ), the first hinge axis 41 and the first track groove 50, the second hinge axis 42 and the third The relative positions of the two track grooves 60. As shown in Figure 6 and Figure 13, with represents the position within the opening angle range for comparison with when the door 30 is opened to other angles.
  • the positioning central axis P is located at the second positioning point P 2 of the first trajectory S, and the second positioning point P 2 is located at the first positioning point P 1 The side close to the door side wall 32.
  • the guide central axis Q is located at the second guide point Q 2 of the second trajectory line K, and the second guide point Q 2 is located on the side of the first guide point Q 1 close to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31 .
  • the positioning center axis P is located at the third positioning point P 3 of the linear trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S, and the third positioning point P 3 is located on the side of the second positioning point P 2 close to the door side wall 32 .
  • the third positioning point P 3 is the end point of the straight track segment close to the door side wall 32 , that is, the third positioning point P 3 is the end point of the first hinge axis 41 moving in a straight line toward the door side wall 32 relative to the first track groove 50 .
  • the guide central axis Q is located at the third guide point Q 3 of the second trajectory line K, and the third guide point Q 3 is located on the side of the second guide point Q 2 close to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31 .
  • G 2 any value of G 2 ⁇ [26°, 30°].
  • any opening angle in the range of G 2 to G 4 can represent that when the door 30 is opened to this range, the first hinge axis 41 and the first track groove 50, the second hinge axis 42 and the second track groove 60 relative position.
  • take It represents the position when the door 30 is opened to this angle range for comparison with when the door 30 is opened to other angles.
  • the positioning center axis P is located at the fourth positioning point P4 of the first trajectory S, and the fourth positioning point P4 is located at the third positioning point P3 close to the door.
  • the side wall 32 is close to the side of the door front wall 31;
  • the guide central axis Q is located at the fourth guide point Q 4 of the second trajectory line K, and the fourth guide point Q 4 is located at the third guide point Q 3 close to the door side wall 32 and The side away from the door front wall 31.
  • the positioning center axis P is located at the fifth positioning point P 5 of the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S, and the fifth positioning point P 5 is located at the side of the fourth positioning point P 4 close to the door side wall 32 and the door front wall 31 .
  • the guide central axis Q is located at the fifth guide point Q 5 of the second trajectory line K, and the fifth guide point Q 5 is located on the side of the fourth guide point Q 4 close to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31 .
  • any value of G 4 ⁇ [88°, 92°].
  • the first hinge axis 41 is positioned relative to the first track groove 50 at a position close to the door side wall 32 when the door 30 is closed. side; that is, the fifth positioning point P 5 is located on the side of the first positioning point P 1 close to the door side wall 32 .
  • any opening angle in this interval can represent the relative positions of the first hinge axis 41 and the first track groove 50 , the second hinge axis 42 and the second track groove 60 when the door body 30 is opened to this interval.
  • with represents the position of the door 30 within the opening angle range for comparison with when the door 30 is opened to other states.
  • the positioning central axis P is located at the sixth positioning point P 6 of the first trajectory S, the sixth positioning point P 6 is located at the fifth positioning point P 5 and is close to the door side wall 32 and The side close to the door front wall 31.
  • the guide central axis Q is located at the sixth guide point Q 6 of the second trajectory line K, and the sixth guide point Q 6 is located on the side of the fifth guide point Q 5 close to the door side wall 32 and the door front wall 31 .
  • the first positioning point P 1 , the second positioning point P 2 , the third positioning point P 3 , the fourth positioning point P 4 , the fifth positioning point P 5 and the sixth positioning point P 6 are sequentially distributed along the first trajectory line S.
  • the second positioning point P 2 , the third positioning point P 3 , and the fourth positioning point P 4 are distributed along the straight line track segment in the direction close to the door side wall 32
  • the fourth positioning point P 4 , the fifth positioning point P 5 , and the fourth positioning point P 4 are distributed in the direction close to the door side wall 32 .
  • the six positioning points P 6 are distributed along the curved track segment in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and close to the door front wall 31 .
  • the first guide point Q 1 , the second guide point Q 2 , the third guide point Q 3 , the fourth guide point Q 4 , the fifth guide point Q 5 , and the sixth guide point Q 6 are distributed along the first trajectory line S in sequence.
  • the second guide point Q 2 , the third guide point Q 3 , the fourth guide point Q 4 , and the fifth guide point Q 5 are distributed along the second trajectory line K in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31
  • the fifth guide point Q 5 and the sixth guide point Q 6 are distributed along the second trajectory K in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and close to the door front wall 31 .
  • G 1 , G 2 , G 3 , G 4 , and G max are sequentially recorded as the first angle, the second angle, the third angle, the fourth angle, and the maximum angle.
  • the first hinge shaft 41 always moves relative to the first track groove 50 and always moves in the direction close to the door side wall 32.
  • the hinge shaft 42 always moves relative to the second track groove 60 and always moves in a direction close to the door side wall 32 , that is, during the entire process of opening the door 30 , the first hinge shaft 41 and the second hinge shaft 42 both keep moving in one direction. , without commutation, so that the force directions of the first hinge axis 41 and the second hinge axis 42 are always consistent, which is beneficial to improving the feel of the door 30 opening and closing, improving the user experience, and extending the first track groove 50 and the second Second, the service life of the track groove 60.
  • the first hinge axis 41 and the second hinge axis 42 keep moving, so that the acceleration of the door 30 changes less, which is beneficial to improving the smoothness of the opening of the door 30.
  • the second hinge axis 42 is relative to the second track groove 60
  • the first hinge shaft 41 moves toward the door side wall 32 while the first hinge shaft 41 retracts relative to the first track groove 50 , that is, the first hinge shaft 41 moves away from the door side wall 32 relative to the first track groove 50 .
  • the sixth positioning point Q6 is located on the side of the fifth positioning point Q5 close to the door side wall 32.
  • the guide center axis Q moves to the fifth positioning point Q5 , as the door The body 30 continues to open, the guide center axis Q continues to move in the direction closer to the door side wall 32 to the sixth positioning point Q 6 , and the positioning center axis P moves along the first trajectory line S in the direction away from the door side wall 32 to the sixth positioning point. Click Q 6 .
  • the two hinge axes It can be seen from the positions of the two track grooves that the cooperation relationship between the first hinge axis 41 relative to the first track groove 50 and the second hinge axis 42 relative to the second track groove 60 includes the following situations.
  • the first hinge shaft 41 moves along the linear track section of the first track groove 50 .
  • the first hinge axis 41 moves to the end point of the straight track segment of the first track groove 50 close to the door side wall 32 (ie, the third positioning point P 3 ).
  • the first hinge shaft 41 moves along the curved track segment of the first track groove 50 .
  • the second hinge axis 42 moves along the second track groove 60 in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31 .
  • the second hinge shaft 42 moves along the second track groove 60 in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and close to the door front wall 31 .
  • the process of opening the door 30 from the closed state to G max can be divided into three stages.
  • the relative movement of the three stages will be described from the perspective of the cooperation relationship between the first hinge axis 41 and the first track groove 50 and the second hinge axis 42 and the second track groove 60 .
  • the door body 30 is rotated and opened from the closed state to G 2 .
  • the door body 30 is opened from 0° through G 1 to G 2 .
  • the positioning center axis P moves from the first positioning point P 1 along the linear trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S toward the direction close to the door side wall 32 ;
  • the guide center axis Q moves from the first guide point Q 1 along the second
  • the trajectory line K moves in a direction closer to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31 .
  • the positioning center axis P moves from the first positioning point P 1 to the third positioning point P 3 along the linear trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S through the second positioning point P 2 ;
  • the guide center axis Q moves from the first guide point Q 1 Move along the second trajectory line K through the second guide point Q 2 to the third guide point Q 3 .
  • the axis line segment PQ changes from P 1 Q 1 rotates clockwise and moves to the outer side sequentially to P 2 Q 2 and P 3 Q 3 (i.e., P 1 Q 1 ⁇ P 2 Q 2 ⁇ P 3 Q 3 ).
  • the axis line segment PQ represents the movement of the hinge plate 40 provided on the box body 10 . Therefore, if the door body 30 is used as a stationary reference object, during the process of the door body 30 opening from the closed state to G 2 , the box body 10 (or the hinge plate 40) keeps rotating clockwise relative to the door body 30 and toward the desired direction. Said outside moves a certain distance.
  • the box 10 when the box 10 is used as a stationary reference object (or the hinge plate 40 is used as a stationary reference object), during the process of the door body 30 opening from the closed state to G 2 , the door body 30 (or, The first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60) rotate counterclockwise relative to the box body 10 and move a certain distance toward the inside.
  • the door body 30 when the door body 30 is opened, it moves a certain distance to the inside, so that the displacement of the first side edge W to the outside caused by the rotation of the door body 30 can be compensated, and interference between the door body 30 and the cabinet 100 can be avoided.
  • the door body 30 is rotated and opened from G 2 to G 4 .
  • the door 30 is opened from G 2 through G 3 to G 4 .
  • the positioning central axis P moves from the third positioning point P 3 along the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory S toward the door side wall 32 and the door front wall 31
  • the guide central axis Q moves from the third positioning point P 3 to the direction close to the door side wall 32 and the door front wall 31 .
  • the guide point Q 3 moves along the second trajectory K in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31 .
  • the positioning center axis P moves from the third positioning point P 3 to the fifth positioning point P 5 along the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S through the fourth positioning point P 4 ;
  • the guide center axis Q moves from the third guide point Q 3 Move along the second trajectory line K through the fourth guide point Q 4 to the fifth guide point Q 5 .
  • the door 30 is rotated and opened from G4 to Gmax .
  • the positioning central axis P moves from the fifth positioning point P 5 along the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory S toward the door side wall 32 and the door front wall 31
  • the guide central axis Q moves from the fifth positioning point P 5 to the direction close to the door side wall 32 and the door front wall 31
  • the guide point Q 5 moves along the second trajectory line K in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and close to the door front wall 31 .
  • the positioning central axis P moves from the fifth positioning point P 5 along the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory S to the sixth positioning point P 6 ; the guiding center axis Q moves from the fifth guiding point Q 5 along the second trajectory K to the sixth guide point Q 6 .
  • the first trajectory groove 50 and the second The track groove 60 is a stationary reference object, and the axis line segment PQ rotates clockwise from P 3 Q 3 and moves to the outside via P 4 Q 4 and P 5 Q 5 to P 6 Q 6 (i.e., P 3 Q 3 ⁇ P 4 Q 4 ⁇ P 5 Q 5 ⁇ P 6 Q 6 ).
  • the axis line segment PQ represents the movement of the hinge plate 40 provided on the box body 10 . Therefore, if the door body 30 is used as a stationary reference object, during the process of the door body 30 opening from G 2 to G max , the box body 10 (or the hinge plate 40 ) keeps rotating clockwise relative to the door body 30 and toward the above-mentioned direction. Move outside.
  • the door body 30 rotate counterclockwise relative to the box body 10 and move toward the inside. That is to say, the door 30 moves a certain distance inward while being opened.
  • the door 30 is rotated and opened from G 2 to G max , and the first hinge shaft 41 moves along the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory groove 50 .
  • the door 30 rotates around a dynamically changing point, thereby causing the door 30 to move inward.
  • the door body 30 With the box body 10 as a stationary reference object, the door body 30 always has a tendency to move toward the inside to compensate for the displacement of the first side edge W toward the outside caused by the rotation of the door body 30, thereby preventing the door body from moving. 30 interferes with the cabinet 100 when opened.
  • the door 30 when the door 30 is opened from the closed state to G max , the door 30 always moves inward relative to the position of the central axis P of the first hinge axis 41 when the door 30 is closed. That is, when the first hinge axis 41 is used as a stationary reference object, when the door body 30 is opened from the closed state to G max , the door body 30 always moves inward relative to the central axis P of the first hinge axis 41 .
  • the position of the first hinge axis 41 when the door body 30 is closed is recorded as the first initial position. Then, when the door body 30 is closed, 30 is opened from the closed state to G max , the distance between the first hinge axis 41 and the first initial position gradually increases. That is, when the door body 30 is opened from the closed state to G max , the first hinge axis 41 always moves relative to the door body 30 in a direction close to the door side wall 32 .
  • the first hinge axis 41 moves along the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and close to the door front wall 31 , Every time the door 30 rotates and opens by a unit angle, the speed at which the first hinge axis 41 moves toward the door front wall 31 is approximately equal to the speed at which it moves toward the door side wall 32 (that is, the difference between the two speeds is less than 1 mm).
  • the first hinge axis 41 moves linearly along the linear groove section of the first track groove 50 , and the door body 30 moves a distance ⁇ 1 toward the inner side per opening unit angle of rotation.
  • the first hinge axis 41 makes a curved movement along the curved groove section of the first track groove 50, and the door body 30 moves inward by a distance of ⁇ 2 per opening unit angle of rotation. For example, ⁇ 1 > ⁇ 2 .
  • the door 30 moves a large distance toward the inside per opening unit angle, so that the door 30 can quickly and fully move toward the inside in the first stage.
  • the inner displacement can effectively compensate the displacement of the first side edge W to the outer side due to the rotation of the door body 30 and avoid interference between the first side edge W and the cabinet 100 .
  • the first hinge shaft 41 quickly moves toward the door side wall 32 to quickly separate the door seal 5 from the front end surface of the box 10 , thereby effectively reducing the squeeze on the door seal 5 .
  • the arrangement of trajectory grooves with the above trajectory characteristics is more compact and the movement efficiency is higher.
  • the essence of the door body 30 of the refrigerator moving toward the inside is that the first track groove 50 moves toward the inside. Therefore, in the first stage, the efficiency of the lateral movement of the first track groove 50 is high. , the door body 30 moves inward quickly, which is beneficial to reducing the difficulty of designing and arranging the track grooves.
  • the door seal 5 includes a side seal 5 a close to the door side wall 32 .
  • the distance between the first initial position and the plane where the door side wall 32 is located is greater than The distance between the side seal 5a and the plane where the door side wall 32 is located.
  • the distance change is recorded as ⁇ 1 ; during the process of the door body 30 opening from G 1 to G 2 , every time the door body 30 rotates by a unit angle, the central axis of the first hinge axis 41 and the distance between the side seal 5 a and the distance away from the door side wall 32
  • ⁇ 2 the change in distance of the edge
  • the change rate of the distance between the central axis of the first hinge shaft 41 and the edge of the side seal 5 a away from the door side wall 32 is greater than that of the door body 30 when the door body 30 is opened from G 1 to G 2 .
  • the distance change rate between the central axis of the first hinge shaft 41 and the edge of the side seal 5a away from the door side wall 32 is . That is, during the movement process of the door body 30 opening from the closed state to G1 , the lateral distance between the central axis of the first hinge shaft 41 and the edge of the side seal 5a away from the door side wall 32 quickly becomes shorter.
  • the first hinge axis 41 moves quickly relative to the linear track section of the first track groove 50, thereby effectively reducing the movement of the side seal 5a perpendicular to the plane of the access opening during the opening process of the door 30.
  • the amount of compression reduces the extrusion of the opposite side seal 5a and also reduces the resistance when the door body 30 is opened.
  • the transition of the door body 30 from the closed state to the first opening stage of G 1 to the second opening stage of G 1 to G 2 is more natural, the door body 30 will not jump, and the smoothness is higher.
  • the curvature changes of the second trajectory line K of the second trajectory groove 60 during the first opening stage and the second opening stage are consistent. That is, the curvature changes of the curve segments Q 1 Q 2 and the curve segments Q 2 Q 3 on the first trajectory line K are consistent.
  • the second trajectory groove 60 is a quasi-elliptical arc groove
  • the second trajectory line K is a quasi-elliptical arc.
  • the elliptical arc-like groove is a groove having a central trajectory line (second trajectory line K) similar to an elliptical arc shape.
  • Similar elliptical arcs include standard elliptical arcs (or part of a standard ellipse), and non-standard elliptical arcs that deviate from the standard elliptical arc but still have the characteristics of an elliptical arc trajectory due to manufacturing or assembly errors or slight deformation. That is, a groove whose center trajectory line can be approximated as an elliptical arc is a quasi-elliptical arc groove.
  • the first hinge axis 41 performs a linear motion stage along the linear groove section of the first track groove 50 (ie, the first stage).
  • the average motion of the first hinge axis 41 relative to the linear groove section of the first track groove 50 is The speed of movement is recorded as the first average speed ⁇ 1 .
  • the first hinge axis 41 performs a curved movement stage along the curved groove section of the first track groove 50 (ie, the second stage and the third stage).
  • the average movement speed of the first hinge shaft 41 relative to the curved groove section of the first track groove 50 It is recorded as the second average speed ⁇ 2 .
  • ⁇ 1 > ⁇ 2 .
  • the average movement speed of the first hinge axis 41 is greater than the first hinge during the process when the door 30 is opened from the second angle G 2 to the maximum angle G max
  • the average movement speed of axis 41 reduce the movement speed of the door body 30 in the second and third stages, so that the door body can be opened quickly, and can prevent the hinge axis from impacting the track groove when the door is opened with great force, thus helping to extend the track.
  • G 2 45° is set, that is, when the door body 30 is opened from the closed state to 45°, the first hinge axis 41 moves along a straight line, and the first hinge axis 41 and the second hinge axis 42 work together, so that The door body 30 undergoes lateral displacement, that is, moves toward the inner side.
  • the door body 30 When the door body 30 is opened from the closed state to 45°, the door body 30 mainly moves inward.
  • the linear groove section of the first track groove 50 is parallel to the door front wall 31 to improve the efficiency of the door body 30 moving inward.
  • the distance between the point where the door body 30 is close to the plane where the access opening is located and the plane where the access opening is located is recorded as the minimum distance L min ; when the door body 30 is opened to the angle When , the minimum distance is When the door 30 is opened to 90°, the minimum distance L min (90°) is the largest. That is to say, when the door 30 is opened to 90°, the minimum distance between the door 30 and the plane where the access port is located is L min (90°) max.
  • the door side wall 32 and the plane of the access opening are approximately parallel (the angle between the door side wall 32 and the plane of the access opening is less than 3°).
  • the door side wall 32 is parallel to the plane where the access opening is located, and the door front wall 31 is approximately parallel to the reference plane M 0 .
  • the first hinge axis 41 moves in the direction close to the first side edge W (that is, close to the door front wall 31 and the door side wall 32), then The door body 30 has a tendency to move toward the inner side and the front side (the side away from the access opening), that is, the door body 30 moves in a direction away from the cabinet 100 and the box body 10 .
  • the maximum angle at which the door 30 can be opened is recorded as G max .
  • the door 30 moves in any direction from 90° to the maximum angle G max .
  • the cabinet 100 moves inward and forward to reduce the restricting effect of the cabinet 100 on the door 30, thereby increasing the maximum opening angle of the door 30, that is, G max > G ⁇ max .
  • the opening of the door 30 is not restricted by the cabinet 100; for example, the maximum angle at which the door 30 can be opened is G max + ⁇ G, where ⁇ G>0°.
  • G max is any value from 90° to 105°
  • ⁇ G is any value from 8° to 12°.
  • the door side wall 32 of the door body 30 when the door body 30 is closed, the door side wall 32 of the door body 30 is located on the side of the reference plane M 0 close to the cabinet 100 , that is, located on the outside of the reference plane M 0 .
  • the box 10 Since the box 10 is in the foaming process, it is easy to cause the box 10 to bulge, making the front (ie, the front side) unsightly.
  • the door side wall 32 In order to ensure a beautiful appearance, when the door 30 is closed, the door side wall 32 is positioned outside the reference plane M 0 so that the box 10 can be shielded.
  • the distance between the plane where the door side wall 32 is located and the reference plane M 0 is marked as ⁇ , and ⁇ is set to any value between 1 mm and 2 mm.
  • the plane where the surface of the door seal 5 away from the door front wall 31 is approximately parallel to the reference plane M 0 .
  • the angle between the two planes is less than 3°, the relationship between the two planes can be regarded as “parallel” or “approximately parallel”, that is, “approximately parallel” includes the mathematical definition
  • Parallel also includes the relationship between two surfaces with an included angle greater than 0° and less than 3°.
  • the door seal 5 includes a side seal 5a close to the door side wall 32.
  • the edge of the door seal 5 (or side seal 5a) close to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31 is marked as a side. Sealing edge F.
  • the angle between the plane of the surface of the door seal 5 away from the door front wall 31 and the side wall of the first body is recorded as the second included angle ⁇ .
  • the second included angle ⁇ shows an increasing trend; and the side sealing edge F gradually moves away from the door body 30 and opens to 90°.
  • the door seal 5 moves away from the front wall of the door The plane where the surface of 31 lies.
  • the second side edge N is closer to the reference plane M 0 than the side sealing edge F. That is, as the opening angle of the door body 30 increases from 90° to the maximum angle G max , the blocking of the access opening by the door seal 5 gradually decreases, and the blocking of the access opening by the door body 30 gradually decreases.
  • the above arrangement allows the door 30 of the refrigerator 1 installed in the cabinet 100 to be opened to a larger angle (such as greater than 90°), so that the user can easily access items stored on the shelves of the door 30 and reduce the number of doors.
  • the body 30 blocks the access opening, thereby increasing the size of the drawer installed in the storage room and increasing the space utilization of the storage room.
  • the refrigerator 1 is installed in the cabinet 100.
  • the door front wall 31 is in contact with the cabinet 100.
  • the straight line defined by the side sealing edge F and the second side edge N is consistent with the distance between the door seal 5 and the distance between the door seal 5 and the door front wall 31 when the door 30 is opened to 90°.
  • the planes of the surfaces are approximately parallel.
  • the straight line between the side sealing edge F of the door seal 5 which is close to the door side wall and away from the door front wall and the second side edge N of the door body 30 opens to 90° with the door body.
  • the angle between the planes is any value between 0° and 3°.
  • the fourth reference plane M 4 when the door body 30 is opened to 90°, the plane where the surface of the door seal 5 away from the door front wall 31 is located is recorded as the fourth reference plane M 4 , and the fourth reference plane M 4 remains stationary relative to the box 10 , it does not move with the movement of the door body 30 .
  • the second side edge N is located between the fourth reference plane M 4 and the datum plane M 0 ; that is, the distance between the second side edge N and the fourth reference plane M 4 is greater than 0.
  • the second side edge N is located between the fourth reference plane M 4 and the reference plane M 0 . That is, the distance between the second side edge N and the fourth reference plane M 4 is greater than 0.
  • the door sealing edge F is located between the second side edge N and the fourth reference plane M 4 .
  • the second side edge N is located at the side sealing edge F away from the fourth reference plane.
  • the angle between the straight line FN determined by the projection point F and the projection point N and the fourth reference plane M 4 is less than 15°.
  • the straight line FN is approximately parallel to the fourth reference plane M 4 (the angle is less than 3°).
  • the door body 30 has a second side edge N and a first side edge W.
  • the second side edge N is smaller than the first side edge N.
  • One edge W is closer to the box 10 .
  • a first reference plane M 1 and a second reference plane M 2 are further defined.
  • the first reference plane M 1 is a plane parallel to the reference plane M 0 and perpendicular to the plane where the access port is located.
  • the first reference plane M 1 is located outside the reference plane M 0 as shown, and both The distance between the planes is ⁇ , that is, the first reference plane M 1 is the plane where the cabinet 100 is close to the inner wall of the box 10 .
  • the second reference plane M 2 is the plane where the access opening of the storage room is located.
  • the first reference plane M 1 and the second reference plane M 2 are reference planes that remain stationary relative to the box 10 . That is to say, the first reference plane M 1 and the second reference plane M 2 do not move with the movement of the door 30 during the opening process of the door 30 relative to the box 10 . It should be noted that the second reference plane M 2 is the plane where the access opening defined by the box 10 is located, and it will not move due to other components such as deformable door seals being provided at the access opening of the box.
  • the first side edge W first moves toward the first reference plane M 1 and the second reference plane M 2 , and then moves away from the first reference plane M 1 and the second reference plane M 2 .
  • the first reference plane M 1 moves in a direction close to the second reference plane M 2 .
  • the second side edge N first moves in a direction away from the first reference plane M 1 and close to the second reference plane M 2 , and then moves in a direction away from the first reference plane M 1 and away from the second reference plane M 2 .
  • the curve trajectory formed by the movement of the first side edge W is a smooth curve
  • the curve trajectory formed by the movement of the second side edge N is a smooth curve
  • the angle between the movement direction of the first side edge W and the first reference plane M 1 shows a decreasing trend
  • the angle between the second side edge W and the first reference plane M 1 shows a decreasing trend
  • the angle between the movement direction of N and the second direction formed by the second reference plane M 2 shows a decreasing trend.
  • the angle between the movement direction of the first side edge W and the third direction formed by the first reference plane M 1 shows an increasing trend.
  • the angle between the movement direction of the second side edge N and the fourth direction formed by the second reference plane M 2 also shows an increasing trend.
  • the side sealing edge F moves in a direction away from the first reference plane M 1 and the second reference plane M 2 (always maintained).
  • the side sealing edge F moves in a direction close to the first reference plane M 1 and away from the second reference plane M 2 ; that is, when the door body 30 is opened to 90° °, the distance between the side sealing edge F and the first reference plane M 1 reaches the maximum value.
  • the movement trajectory of the side sealing edge F is approximately an arc. That is, during the opening process of the door body 30, the side sealing edge F moves approximately in a circular arc.
  • approximately arc includes mathematically defined standard arcs, as well as arcs with minor deviations from standard arcs. For example, this small deviation is limited to 1 mm.
  • first gap J 1 between the end surface of the first hinge shaft 41 away from the hinge plate 40 and the bottom of the first track groove 50 ; the first gap J 1 is Any value from 1.5mm to 3.5mm.
  • second gap J 2 between the end surface of the second hinge shaft 42 away from the hinge plate 40 and the bottom of the second track groove 60 ; the second gap J 2 is any value from 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm.
  • a tolerance of ⁇ 1mm is reserved.
  • the above settings are beneficial to manufacturing and process adjustment.
  • the upper and lower ends of the door body 30 are prone to misalignment, and a gasket needs to be installed between the hinge axis and the track groove for adjustment.
  • the first gap J 1 is 2 mm
  • the second gap J 2 ⁇ the first gap J 1 .
  • the moving direction of the first hinge axis 41 relative to the first track groove 50 is marked as the first moving direction; the moving direction of the second hinge axis 42 relative to the second track groove 60 is marked as the third moving direction.
  • Two displacement directions, the angle between the first displacement direction and the second displacement direction is recorded as the displacement angle ⁇ ; when the door body is opened from the closed state to 90°, the displacement angle ⁇ remains unchanged or at the preset changes within the range. For example, when the door body is opened from the closed state to 90°, the change in the displacement angle ⁇ is in the range of 0° to 8°.
  • the above settings allow the displacement angle to fluctuate within a small range, that is, to remain relatively constant.
  • the hinge axis (the first hinge axis 41 and the second hinge axis 42)
  • the reaction force (that is, the sum of the forces received by the hinge axis during movement) does not change much, which can effectively reduce the wear of the track groove.
  • the door 30 rotates around a changing point during the opening process, and the changing point is traceable, and its trajectory is (X, Y).
  • X (X1+X2+X3+X4)/4
  • Y (Y1+Y2+Y3+Y4)/4.
  • X1 represents the distance between the center point of the first hinge axis 41 in the first track groove 50 and the door side wall 32 when the door is closed
  • X2 represents the center point of the second hinge axis 42 in the second track groove 60 when the door is closed.
  • X3 represents the distance from the center point of the first hinge axis 41 in the first track groove 50 to the door side wall 32 when the door body rotates and opens;
  • Y1 represents the distance between the center point of the first hinge axis 41 in the first track groove 50 and the door front wall 31 when the door is closed;
  • Y2 represents the center point of the second hinge axis 42 in the second track groove 60 when the door is closed.
  • Y3 represents the distance between the center point of the first hinge axis 41 in the first track groove 50 and the door front wall 31 when the door rotates and opens;
  • Y4 represents the distance of the second hinge axis 42 when the door rotates and opens.
  • the center point of the first hinge axis 41 in the first track groove 50 is the positioning center axis P
  • the center point of the second hinge axis 42 in the second track groove 60 is the guide center axis Q; when the door is closed
  • the distance between point P and the door side wall 32 is a
  • the distance between point P and the door front wall 31 is b
  • the distance between point P and point Q is L
  • the connecting line of PQ is sandwiched between the second reference plane M 2 Angle m.
  • the following description takes the length of the linear trajectory segment of the first trajectory line K as K ⁇ and the curved trajectory segment as an arc (with a radius of R) as an example.
  • the straight track segment and the curved track segment are connected at point P2 and the curved track segment is tangent to the straight track segment.
  • the second opening angle s corresponds to the second angle G 2 in Embodiment 1; in this embodiment, for convenience, it is represented by s. There is no corresponding relationship between the third opening angle t and the third angle G 3 in any embodiment.
  • the position of point P is (a, b), and the position of point P2 is (a+L*cosm, bL*sinm).
  • X2 a+2R*[sin(n-s)/2]*[cos(3n-s)/2]+L*cos(n+m-s)
  • Y2 b-2R*[sin (n-s)/2]*[sin(3n-s)/2]-L*sin(n+m-s).
  • X4 a-2R*[sin(n-t)/2]*[cos(180°-(3n-t)/2)]+L*cos(m+n-t)
  • Y4 b +2R*[sin(n-t)/2]*[sin(180-(3n-t)/2)]-L*sin(m+n-t).
  • the door 30 rotates around a dynamically changing point, thereby causing the door 30 to move inward.
  • the hinge assembly in the second embodiment has the same principle as the hinge assembly in the first embodiment. The difference is that the shape of the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 is limited in the second embodiment.
  • the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 are regular curves.
  • the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S and the second trajectory line K are both smooth curves, and the curved trajectory segment and the straight trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S are smooth. Transition connection.
  • the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S is tangent to the straight trajectory segment.
  • the groove wall of the curved groove section of the first track groove 50 is a smooth curved surface
  • the groove wall of the second track groove 60 is also a smooth curved surface
  • the groove wall of the linear groove section of the first track groove 50 is the same as the groove wall of the curved groove section.
  • Wall smooth transition connection For example, the planar groove wall of the linear groove section of the first track groove 50 is tangent to the curved groove wall of the curved groove section.
  • the above arrangement allows the first hinge shaft 41 to move smoothly relative to the first track groove 50 and the second hinge shaft 42 to move smoothly relative to the second track groove 60, which is beneficial to improving the smoothness of opening the door 30 and extending the service life of the hinge shaft.
  • the movement of the first hinge shaft 41 relative to the first track groove 50 is continuous and uninterrupted
  • the movement of the second hinge shaft 42 relative to the second track groove 60 is continuous and uninterrupted.
  • the movement of the first hinge shaft 41 relative to the first track groove 50 and the movement of the second hinge shaft 42 relative to the second track groove 60 are equivalent to the movement of the roller relative to the cam.
  • the size of the roller radius often affects the shape of the actual contour curve of the cam, so the radius of the roller needs to be selected reasonably.
  • ⁇ is the theoretical profile radius
  • ⁇ ′ is the actual profile radius
  • r T is the roller radius.
  • the roller radius r T needs to be smaller than the minimum curvature radius ⁇ min of the convex part of the theoretical profile curve, for example, r T ⁇ 0.8 ⁇ min . If this requirement cannot be met, increase the radius of the cam base circle and redesign the cam profile curve.
  • the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S corresponds to the cam theoretical profile curve of the first trajectory groove 50, and the cam theoretical profile curve is an outward convex curve (the curved groove segment is oriented toward the door side wall 32). convex direction).
  • the groove wall of the first track groove 50 close to the door front wall 31 is an actual contour curve.
  • the size of the radius r T of the first hinge axis 41 satisfies the setting of (1) ( ⁇ min > r T ) to ensure that the groove wall of the first track groove 50 close to the door front wall 31 is a smooth curve.
  • the second trajectory line K corresponds to the cam theoretical profile curve of the second trajectory groove 60
  • the cam theoretical profile curve is a convex curve (the second trajectory groove protrudes in the direction away from the door front wall)
  • the groove wall of the track groove 60 close to the door front wall 31 is an actual contour curve; the radius of the second hinge axis 42 also satisfies r T and the size satisfies the setting of (1) ( ⁇ min > r T ) to ensure that the second track groove
  • the groove wall of 60 close to the door front wall 31 is a smooth curve, which on the one hand makes the first hinge axis 41 move smoothly and on the other hand reduces the wear of the second track groove 60.
  • the second track groove 60 is essentially configured as a cam, which can effectively avoid the defects of discontinuous movement and easy wear caused by the concave structure.
  • the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory S and the second trajectory K are both configured as convex cam curves.
  • the curved trajectory segment of the first trajectory S and at least part of the second trajectory K may also be configured as a concave curve.
  • the part of the second trajectory line K close to the door side wall 32 may be set as a curve extending in a direction close to the door side wall 32 and away from the door front wall 31 .
  • the curved track section of the first track line S and the portion of the second track line K close to the door side wall 32 are set as concave curves, so that the first hinge axis 41 and the second hinge axis 42 move smoothly along them. .
  • the settings of the third embodiment are the same as those of the first and/or second embodiment.
  • the difference is that compared with the situation of the aforementioned first and second embodiments, as shown in Figures 25 to 27, the second trajectory line K Including the seventh guide point Q 0 located on the side of the first guide point Q 1 away from the door side wall 32 and away from the door rear wall 33 , the first trajectory line S includes the seventh guide point Q 0 located on the side of the first positioning point P 1 away from the door side wall 32 The seventh anchor point P 0 .
  • the central axis (positioning central axis P) of the first hinge axis 41 is located at the seventh positioning point P 0
  • the central axis (guiding central axis Q) of the second hinge axis 42 is located at the seventh guiding point Q 0
  • the central axis (positioning central axis P) of the first hinge axis 41 is located at the first positioning point P 1
  • the central axis (guide central axis Q) of the second hinge axis 42 is located at the first guide point P 1 .
  • Point Q 1 is .
  • the first hinge axis 41 moves in a straight line from the seventh positioning point P 0 toward the door side wall 32 to the first positioning point P 1 .
  • 42 moves from the seventh guide point Q 0 to the first guide point Q 1 .
  • the second hinge axis 42 is When 30 is closed, the central axis of the first hinge axis 41 is the rotation axis and performs approximate rotational motion.
  • the approximate rotational motion includes the standard definition of rotational motion around an axis, and also includes the rotational motion of the second hinge axis 42 when the first hinge axis 41 is slightly displaced relative to the first track groove 50 in the above process. .
  • the approximate rotational motion includes a rotational motion of the second hinge axis 42 with the central axis of the moving first hinge axis 41 as the rotation axis, and when the door body 30 rotates by a unit angle, the center of the first hinge axis 41 rotates
  • the displacement distance of the shaft is less than 0.5mm.
  • the approximate rotational movement includes that the displacement of the first hinge axis 41 relative to the first track groove 50 is less than 0.2 mm during the opening of the door body 30 from the closed state to G 0 . That is, the “approximate rotational motion” includes the case where the first hinge shaft 41 moves slightly relative to the first track groove 50 .
  • G 0 is any value from 7° to 10°.
  • the length of the line segment P 0 P 1 on the first trajectory arc K is 0 to 0.2 mm.
  • the door 30 In the initial stage of opening the door 30 (that is, when the door 30 is opened from the closed state to G 0 ), the door 30 mainly rotates, so that the mutual suction force between the door 30 and the box 10 can be quickly overcome. Separate the door 30 from the box 10 .
  • the main difference between the fourth embodiment and the third embodiment is that the door body 30 is provided with a flip beam 9 .
  • the refrigerator 1 includes two opposite door bodies 30 , and the two opposite door bodies 30 cooperate together to open or close the access opening.
  • the flip beam 9 is arranged on the inner lining surface of one door body 30 and is close to the other door body 30 .
  • a guide groove 14 is provided on the top wall of the storage compartment of the refrigerator.
  • the flipping beam 9 can slide with the guide groove 14 to realize switching of different angles between the flipping beam 9 and its corresponding door body 30 .
  • the flipping beam 9 closes the gap between the two doors 30 and the box 10 to effectively prevent cold air from overflowing.
  • the refrigerator 1 further includes a guide block 13 , which is disposed on the top of the flip beam 9 and corresponds to the position of the guide groove 14 .
  • the door body 30 (or the first track groove 50 and The second track groove 60) is a stationary reference object, and the second hinge shaft 42 performs approximate rotational motion with the central axis of the first hinge shaft 41 as the rotation axis.
  • the process of the door body 30 rotating and closing from G 0 to the closed state corresponds to the process of the guide block 13 and the guide groove 14 on the flipping beam 9 contacting the flipping beam 9 to complete the flipping.
  • the guide block 13 at the top of the flip beam 9 contacts the guide groove 14 on the box 10 , and the guide block 13 is in contact with the guide groove 14 on the box 10 . 13 begins to enter the guide groove 14; when the door body 30 is closed, the flipping beam 9 completes the flipping.
  • the arrangement of the fourth embodiment ensures that the force that promotes the flipping of the flipping beam 9 on the door body 30 will not be offset as the door body 30 moves to the outside, thereby preventing the guide block 13 from entering the guide groove 14 due to incomplete flipping. is stuck, effectively ensuring that the door body 30 of the rotating beam is closed in place, thereby ensuring the effectiveness of low-temperature storage of the refrigerator.
  • the principle of the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the first to fourth embodiments, and the main difference lies in that the situation in which the door 30 continues to close from the closed state to the box 10 is limited.
  • the third reference plane M 3 intersects the reference plane M 0 at the theoretical first side edge W when the door body 30 is closed.
  • the third reference plane M 3 does not move during the opening or closing process of the door 30 relative to the box 10 , and is a reference plane that remains stationary relative to the box 10 .
  • the door front wall 31 is parallel to the second reference plane M2 , that is, the door front wall 31 is coplanar with the third reference plane M3 ; that is, the third reference plane
  • the plane M 3 passes through the plane where the door front wall 31 is located when the door body 30 is in the closed state, and the third reference plane M 3 passes through the first side edge W.
  • the angle between the door front wall 31 and the third reference plane M 3 is a positive number; when the door front wall When the end of 31 away from the door side wall 32 is located on the side of the third reference plane M 3 close to the box 10 , the angle between the door front wall 31 and the third reference plane M 3 is a negative number.
  • the end of the door front wall 31 away from the door side wall 32 can move to the third position.
  • the reference plane M 3 is close to the side of the box 10 , and there is an included angle ⁇ 1 between the door front wall 31 and the third reference plane M 3 ; ⁇ 1 ⁇ 0°.
  • the included angle between the door front wall 31 and the third reference plane M 3 is ⁇ 1
  • the included angle ⁇ 1 is any value from 0° to -3°.
  • the second hinge shaft 42 makes an approximate rotational movement with the central axis of the first hinge shaft 41 as the rotation axis. That is, when the door body 30 continues to close from the closed state to ⁇ 1 , the maximum displacement of the first hinge axis 41 relative to the first track groove 50 is less than 0.2 mm.
  • the above arrangement prevents the second hinge shaft 42 from contacting the end of the second track groove 60 away from the door side wall 32 and causing the door 30 to pop open when the door 30 is thrown hard against the box 10 .
  • the width of the third gap ⁇ 1 is 0. to any value of 0.2mm.
  • the width of the third gap ⁇ 1 is 0.
  • the first hinge shaft 41 is in contact with the end wall of the first track groove 50 away from the door side wall 32 , and the door body 30 is moved from the closed state along the closing direction. When the movement continues, the first hinge shaft 41 remains in contact with the first track groove 50 .
  • the second trajectory line K has a reserved guide point Q'.
  • the guide center axis Q is located at the reserved guide point Q'.
  • the trajectory segment between the reserved guide point Q ⁇ and the first guide point Q 1 is recorded as the reserved trajectory segment Q ⁇ Q 1 .
  • the reserved track section Q ⁇ Q 1 extends from the first guide point Q 0 to the side close to the door front wall 31 and the door side wall 32 to the reserved guide point Q ⁇ .
  • the first hinge axis 41 moves to the first positioning point P 1 and the second hinge axis moves to the first guide point Q 1 .
  • the first hinge axis 41 moves to the first positioning point P 1 and the second hinge axis moves to the first guide point Q 1 .
  • the hinge axis 41 is maintained at the first positioning point P 1 (the distance moved relative to P 1 to the side away from the door side wall 32 is between 0 and 0.2 mm), and the second hinge axis 42 moves from the first guide point Q 1 to A guide point Q' is reserved, and the rotation angle at which the door 30 continues to move toward the box 10 is denoted by G'.
  • G ⁇ 1 so that when the door body 30 is thrown hard towards the box body 10 , the second hinge shaft 42 can be prevented from being impacted by the end of the second track groove 60 away from the door side wall 32 .
  • the second hinge axis 42 The central axis of the first hinge shaft 41 is used as the rotation axis to perform approximate rotational motion.
  • G ⁇ ⁇ 1 , so that when the angle between the door front wall 31 and the third reference plane M 3 reaches ⁇ 1 , the end of the first hinge axis 41 and the first track groove 50 away from the door side wall 32 The end walls are in contact, and the second hinge shaft 42 is in contact with the end wall of the end of the second track groove 60 away from the door side wall 32 .
  • the principle of the sixth embodiment is substantially the same as that of the first to fifth embodiments. The difference is that the sixth embodiment limits the arrangement of the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 on the door body 30 .
  • the door body 30 includes a mounting block 80.
  • the mounting block 80 is integrally formed and installed on the door body 30 at a position opposite to the hinge plate 40.
  • the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 are formed in the mounting block.
  • On block 80 On block 80.
  • the mounting block 80 includes a track block in which the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 are formed.
  • the first track groove 50 includes a groove bottom and a circumferential groove wall surrounding the edge of the groove bottom.
  • the circumferential groove wall surrounds a notch arranged opposite to the groove bottom.
  • the structure of the second track groove 60 is the same as that of the first track groove 50 , which lies in the shape of the groove.
  • the mounting block 80 includes a plate body 81 on which the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 are provided.
  • the door end cover 38 located at the upper end of the door body 30 is provided with a receiving groove 37.
  • the mounting block 80 is disposed in the receiving groove 37.
  • the plate body 81 and the door body 30 can be tightly connected through fasteners such as screws.
  • a plurality of screw holes for connecting the plate body 81 and the receiving groove 37 are provided on the plate body 81 and located at the edges of the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 .
  • the notches of the track grooves (such as the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60) provided on the mounting block 80 at the upper end of the door body 30 are located at the upper end of the groove bottom.
  • the mounting block 80 further includes a dust removal hole 11 .
  • the dust removal holes 11 are provided on the groove bottoms of the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 .
  • the mounting block 80 includes a plurality of dust removal holes 11 , which are respectively disposed on the ends of the groove bottoms of the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 close to or away from the door side wall 32 .
  • the door body 30 can be opened and closed to move the hinge axis to either end of the track groove to drive away the dust or debris. to the position of the dust removal hole 11 and discharged, which is beneficial to improving the service life of the hinge assembly and improving the smoothness of the door 30 opening.
  • a first receiving cavity 371 and a second receiving cavity 372 are formed on the bottom wall of the receiving groove 37 .
  • the first track groove 50 is installed in the first receiving cavity 371
  • the second track groove 60 is installed in the second receiving cavity 372 .
  • the plate body 81 is disposed in the receiving groove 37 and is positioned by the circumferential groove wall of the receiving groove 37 .
  • the installation block 80 is installed in the receiving groove 37, which is beneficial to improving the positioning speed and accuracy of the installation block 80.
  • a dust collecting cavity 12 is provided on the bottom of the first receiving cavity 371 and the second receiving cavity 372 .
  • the position of the dust collecting cavity 12 corresponds to the position of the dust removal hole 11 .
  • the dust falling into the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 is discharged into the dust collection chamber 12 through the dust removal hole 11 under the action of the first hinge shaft 41 or the second hinge shaft 42, thereby helping to improve the performance of the hinge assembly.
  • the service life is beneficial to improving the smoothness of the door 30 opening.
  • first deformation gap between the first track groove 50 and the cavity wall of the first receiving cavity 371; there is a second deformation gap between the second track groove 60 and the cavity wall of the second receiving cavity 372.
  • the arrangement of the first deformation gap and the second deformation gap allows the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 to have deformation space.
  • the first hinge axis 41 moves relative to the first track groove 50 and the second hinge axis 42 moves relative to the second track groove 60, and the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 retain A certain elastic deformation space can increase the service life of the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60. At the same time, it can prevent the door body 30 from jamming due to excessive stiffness and processing errors of the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60. .
  • the end of the hinge assembly away from the first body side wall is provided with a first fitting portion
  • the mounting block 80 has a locking block
  • a second fitting portion is formed on the locking block, and the second fitting portion is used to cooperate with the first The two parts cooperate to realize the locking and unlocking of the door 30 and the box 10.
  • the locking block and the track block are integrally formed to form the mounting block 80 .
  • this embodiment will be explained by taking the installation block 80 provided at the lower end of the door body 30 as an example.
  • the second fitting portion on the locking block is configured as a locking structure.
  • the second fitting portion includes a lock hook 82 provided on a side of the plate body 81 away from the door side wall 32 .
  • the lock hook 82 extends in a direction away from the door side wall 32 and is bent in a direction close to the door rear wall 33 and close to the door side wall 32 .
  • the opening of the lock hook 82 faces the plate body 81 (that is, toward the door side wall 32 ), and the free end of the lock hook 82 is closer to the door rear wall 33 than its fixed end.
  • the first fitting part is provided with the stop part 403
  • the stop part 403 is provided on the side of the hinge plate 40 away from the first body side wall.
  • a hooking gap 404 is formed on the side of the stopper 403 close to the box.
  • the lock hook 82 includes a connecting portion 83 and a hooking portion 84 .
  • the connecting part 83 is connected to the plate body 81
  • the hooking part 84 is connected to the connecting part 83 and bent toward the side close to the door rear wall 33 and the door side wall 32 .
  • the screws pass through the connecting part 83 and are inserted into the door body 30 to firmly connect the connecting part 83 with the door body 30, thereby strengthening the connection strength between the connecting part 83 and the door body 30, so that the lock hook 82 disengages from the stopper part.
  • only the hook portion 84 is deformed.
  • the free ends of the hooking portion 84 and the stopper 403 are both arc-shaped, which facilitates the hooking portion 84 to smoothly hook or break away from the stopper 403 .
  • the free end of the hooking portion 84 gradually approaches the stopper 403 .
  • the hooking portion 84 abuts the stopper 403 , under the action of the reaction force of the stopper 403 , the hooking portion 84 is hooked.
  • the hanging part 84 deforms, causing the stopper 403 to enter the hooking part 84, and the free end of the hooking part 84 to enter the hooking gap 404, thereby locking the lock hook 82 with the hinge plate 40, and realizing the connection between the door 30 and the box. 10's locked.
  • the door 30 when the door 30 is closed from any angle greater than the set angle (for example, 7°) to the set angle, the door 30 is automatically closed under the action of the hook portion 84 and the stopper 403 .
  • the set angle for example, 7°
  • the hooking portion 84 is separated from the stopper portion 403 .
  • the unlocking angle is set to G 1 , that is, when the door body 30 is opened to G 1 and the first hinge shaft 41 moves along the linear trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S, the hook portion 84 and the stopper portion 403 phase separation.
  • the unlocking angle is set to G 2 , that is, when the door body 30 is opened to G 2 and the central axis of the first hinge shaft 41 moves along the linear trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S to its end point close to the door side wall 32 , The hooking portion 84 is separated from the stopper portion 403 .
  • the door body 30 mainly performs rotational movement to facilitate the separation of the lock hook 82 and the stopper 403.
  • the door body 30 is provided with a first protrusion 34 and a second protrusion 35, and a clearance groove is formed between the first protrusion 34 and the second protrusion 35. 36.
  • the first protrusion 34 is generally located on a side of the second protrusion 35 close to the door front wall 31 and the door side wall 32 .
  • the connecting part 83 includes a plug-in plate 86, which is plugged into the gap groove 36. In this way, the connecting part 83 can be prevented from being blocked along the door front wall 31 by the first protrusion 34 and the second protrusion 35. Deformation occurs in the direction to the door rear wall 33 .
  • the plug plate 86 is configured as an arc plate
  • the second protrusion 35 is configured as an arc plate.
  • the first protrusion 34 is close to the edge of the second protrusion 35 and has the same shape as the second protrusion 35 , so as to jointly define an arc-shaped clearance groove 36 with the second protrusion 35 .
  • the arc-shaped plate-shaped plug-in plate cooperates with the arc-shaped clearance slot 36, thereby increasing the area limited by the clearance slot 36 to the connection portion 83, which is beneficial to improving the strength of the connection between the installation block 80 and the door body 30.
  • the track block and the locking block of the installation block 80 are integrally formed.
  • the track block and the locking block are provided separately.
  • the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 are integrally formed on the door end cover 38 , and the locking block separately forms a mounting block 80 to be installed in the receiving groove 37 .
  • the mounting block 80 located at the upper end of the door body 30 includes a track block but not a locking block.
  • the receiving groove 37 provided on the door body adapts to the structure to accommodate and fix the mounting block 80 .
  • the mounting block 80 includes a separately provided track block and a locking block.
  • the refrigerator 1 is configured in the form of a cross door, that is, the refrigerator 1 includes four door bodies 30 , two of which are opposite to each other and the other two are opposite to each other. .
  • the refrigerator includes six hinge assemblies to fix the four doors 30 on the box 10 .
  • the six hinge assemblies include two upper hinge assemblies, two middle hinge assemblies and two lower hinge assemblies.
  • the middle hinge assembly includes a hinge plate and a through shaft, and the through shaft extends upward and downward from the hinge plate.
  • the through shaft includes an upper hinge axis and a lower hinge axis.
  • the upper hinge axis is located on the upper side of the hinge plate and matches with the lower end of the door body 30 located above the middle hinge assembly.
  • the lower hinge axis is located on the lower side of the hinge plate and engages with the middle hinge assembly. The upper end of the lower door body 30 matches.
  • each door body 30 includes a track block
  • the mounting block at the lower end of each door body 30 includes a track block and a locking block.
  • the above arrangement is a cross-door refrigerator, with the refrigerator compartment located above the freezer compartment.
  • the track block at the upper end of the door 30 for opening or closing the refrigerator compartment is the same as the track block at the upper end of the door 30 for opening or closing the freezing compartment.
  • the track block and the locking block at the lower end of the door 30 for opening or closing the refrigerating compartment are the same as the track blocks and the locking block at the lower end of the door 30 for opening or closing the freezing compartment.
  • the above settings increase the versatility of the track block and the locking block, thereby facilitating production and manufacturing and facilitating the assembly of the refrigerator 1.
  • some embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited to including four door bodies 30 , but are also applicable to the refrigerator 1 including at least four door bodies 30 .
  • the mounting block 80 may be made of polyformaldehyde (POM).
  • POM polyformaldehyde
  • the first track groove 50 , the second track groove 60 and the locking structure are integrally formed to form the mounting block 80 , thereby increasing the structural accuracy and strength of the mounting block 80 .
  • the mounting block 80 is integrally formed by injection molding.
  • a limiting structure is provided between the door body 30 and the hinge plate 40 for limiting the opening of the door body 30 to a maximum angle, thereby avoiding damage to the mounting block 80 when the door is opened with great force.
  • the lower end of the door body 30 is provided with a limiting portion 85 , and the limiting portion 85 is located at the front end of the mounting block 80 provided at the lower end of the door body 30 .
  • the hinge plate 40 includes a limiting surface 405 .
  • the limiting surface 405 is provided at an end of the hinge plate 40 away from the box body 10 and close to the first body side wall.
  • the limiting part 85 includes an embedded part 851 and a limiting bar 852 .
  • the limiting part 85 may be a sheet metal part.
  • the embedded part 851 is plate-shaped and is installed in the receiving groove 37 at the lower end of the door body 30.
  • the plate body 81 of the mounting block 80 (track block) clamps the embedded part 851 in the door body 30 from the lower end to achieve position limiting. 85 and the door body 30.
  • the limiting strip 852 is in the shape of a convex strip and is formed by the edge of the embedded part 851 close to the door front wall 31 extending downwardly to the lower surface of the door body 30 , so that when the door body 30 drives the limiting part 85 to rotate to the maximum angle, the limiting strip 852 is formed.
  • the strip 852 will be blocked by the limiting surface 405 of the hinge plate 40, thereby blocking the door body 30 and causing the door body 30 to stop rotating.
  • the limiting part 85 is clamped and fixed in the door body 30 by the mounting block 80 , and the connection structure between the limiting part 85 and the door body 30 is omitted, thus simplifying the product structure.
  • limiting part 85 may also be provided at the upper end of the door body 30 , which will not be described again here.
  • a lock hook 82 is provided on the door body 30.
  • the lock hook 82 is locked with the stopper 403 on the hinge plate 40.
  • the door 30 is mainly rotated in the first stage, so that the lock hook 82 and the stopper 403 on the hinge assembly can be quickly separated to quickly separate the door 30 and the box 10 .
  • the principles of the seventh embodiment are the same as those of the first to sixth embodiments.
  • the seventh embodiment mainly sets the position of the first hinge axis 41 and the second hinge axis 42 when the door body 30 is opened to the maximum angle G max . limited.
  • the eighth embodiment has the same principles as the first to sixth embodiments; compared with the seventh embodiment, the eighth embodiment mainly focuses on the positions of the first hinge axis 41 and the second hinge axis 42 when the door body 30 is opened to the maximum angle G max . Another setting method of limitation.
  • a limiting portion 85 is provided at the lower end of the door body 30, and the limiting portion 85 is close to the door front wall 31.
  • the hinge plate 40 forms a limiting portion at a position far away from one end of the box 10 and close to the first body side wall. Plane 405.
  • the limiting portion 85 resists the limiting surface 405 of the hinge plate 40 , thereby preventing the door body 30 from continuing to rotate.
  • the first hinge axis 41 is in contact with the end of the first track groove 50 close to the door side wall 32 , and the second hinge axis 42 and the second track groove 60 are close to the door side wall.
  • There is a separation gap ⁇ 0 i.e., a gap, see FIG. 44 ) between the ends of 32 , and the width of the separation gap ⁇ 0 is >0.
  • the limiting portion 85 is in contact with the hinge plate 40 and the first hinge shaft 41 is in contact with the end of the first track groove 50 (there is an interaction force) , the second hinge shaft 42 does not contact the end of the second track groove 60 (no interaction force). Relative to the second hinge axis 42 , the first hinge axis 41 is closer to the limiting portion 85 .
  • the above arrangement can reduce the bending moment and stress on the hinge plate 40, which is beneficial to improving the installation stability of the hinge assembly and the box body 10.
  • the mounting block 80 is separately configured as a track block and a locking block.
  • the track block is installed on the side of the door end cover 38 close to the inner cavity of the door body 30 .
  • the track block is installed on the door body 30 at a position opposite to the hinge plate 40 , and the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 are formed on the track block.
  • the track block disposed on the upper end of the door body 30 is used as an example for description.
  • the track block includes a first track groove 50 and a second track groove 60 .
  • the first track groove 50 includes a groove bottom and a circumferential groove wall surrounding the edge of the groove bottom.
  • the circumferential groove wall surrounds a notch arranged opposite to the groove bottom.
  • the structure of the second track groove 60 is the same as that of the first track groove 50 , except for the shape of the groove.
  • the track block includes a plate body 81 on which the first track groove 50 and the second track groove 60 are formed.
  • a receiving groove 37 is formed on the side of the door end cover 38 located at the upper end of the door body 30 away from the hinge assembly.
  • the plate body 81 is arranged in the receiving groove 37 , and the plate body 81 matches the circumferential groove wall of the receiving groove 37 .
  • the receiving groove 37 is provided with a clamping member for fixing the plate body 81 to tightly connect the track block and the door body 30 .
  • the fixing plate 81 and the door end cover 38 can also be fixedly connected through fasteners such as screws.
  • the door end cover 38 is provided with a first through hole 71 and a second through hole 72 near the hinge assembly.
  • the shape of the first through hole 71 is substantially the same as the shape of the slot of the first track groove 50
  • the shape of the second through hole 72 is substantially the same as the shape of the slot of the second track groove 60 .
  • the track block is installed on the side of the door end cover 38 away from the hinge assembly. That is, the track block is installed inside the door body 30 .
  • the plate body 81 of the track block fits with the end wall of the door end cover 38 near the hinge assembly, and is fixedly connected to the door body 30 through the snap connector.
  • the track block and the hinge assembly are respectively located on both sides of the end wall of the door end cover 38 .
  • the notch of the first track groove 50 corresponds to the first through hole 71
  • the notch of the second track groove 60 corresponds to the second through hole 72 .
  • a plurality of fixing posts are provided on the side of the end wall of the door end cover 38 away from the hinge assembly, and a plurality of fixing holes matching the fixing posts are formed on the plate body 81 .
  • the first track groove 50 includes a first ring plate 73 located on a side of the plate body 81 away from the bottom of the first track groove 50 , and the first ring plate 73 defines a first ring plate 73 .
  • the second track groove 60 includes a second ring plate 74 located on a side of the plate body 81 away from the groove bottom of the second track groove 60 .
  • the second ring plate 74 defines a slot of the second track groove 60 .
  • the first ring plate 73 is installed in the first through hole 71
  • the second ring plate 74 is installed in the second through hole 72
  • the plate body 81 matches the end plate of the door body 30 close to the hinge assembly, and is fixed on the plate body 81
  • the cooperation between the hole and the fixing post on the door end cover 38 enables precise positioning and assembly.
  • the above assembly method of the track block and the door end cover 38 in this embodiment allows the track block to be hidden inside the door body 30, thereby improving the aesthetics of the door body 30 and reducing the matching gap between the door body 30 and the track block. It is convenient to clean the door body 30 .
  • the refrigerator includes at least two door bodies 30 arranged in pairs.
  • the track block is provided at the upper end and/or lower end of the door body 30 .
  • the track block at the upper end of the door 30 of the refrigerator 1 close to the first body side wall is the same as the track block at the lower end of the door 30 of the refrigerator 1 close to the second body side wall.
  • the door 30 of the refrigerator 1 close to the first body side wall has the same track block.
  • the track block at the lower end is the same as the track block at the upper end of the door body 30 of the refrigerator 1 close to the second body side wall.
  • the two door bodies 30 provided above need to be connected to the box body 10 through four track blocks.
  • the track block located at the upper end of one door body 30 is the same as the track block located at the lower end of the other door body 30 .
  • the refrigerator 1 in this embodiment only needs to provide two structures of track blocks with only track grooves to meet the installation requirements, thereby improving the versatility of track blocks and other components and helping to reduce the manufacturing cost of the refrigerator 1 .
  • the lower end of the door body 30 is provided with a locking block formed with a lock hook 82.
  • the locking block is located on the side of the track block away from the door side wall 32 and is installed on the first passage.
  • the hole 71 and the second through hole 72 are located away from the receiving groove 37 on one side of the door side wall 32 .
  • the lock hook 82 includes a connecting portion 83 and a hooking portion 84 .
  • the connecting part 83 is connected to the receiving groove 37
  • the hooking part 84 is connected to the connecting part 83 and bent toward the side close to the door rear wall 33 and the door side wall 32 .
  • the screws penetrate the connecting portion 83 to connect with the door body 30 to strengthen the connection strength between the connecting portion 83 and the door body 30, so that only the hook portion 84 of the lock hook 82 is deformed when it breaks away from the stop portion 403.
  • the locking block in this embodiment is installed on the side of the door end cover 38 close to the hinge, that is, the locking block is fixedly installed on the outside of the door body 30 .
  • the locking block in this embodiment has the same arrangement as the locking hook 82 in the aforementioned sixth embodiment, and will not be described again.
  • the hooking portion 84 cooperates with the stopper 403 to realize unlocking or locking of the door 30 and the box 10 .
  • the track block is only provided with a track groove, and the track block is installed on the side of the door end cover 38 away from the hinge assembly. Then, the lock hook 82 forms a separate locking block and is installed on the side of the door end cover 38 close to the hinge. side.
  • the refrigerator 1 includes two door bodies 30 arranged oppositely.
  • the two door bodies 30 cooperate to open or close the access opening.
  • a flip beam 9 is provided on the lining surface of one door body 30 close to the other door body 30 .
  • the top wall of the storage compartment of the refrigerator 1 is provided with a guide groove 14 , and the flipping beam 9 can slide with the guide groove 14 to realize switching of different angles of the flipping beam 9 relative to the door body 30 .
  • the flip beam 9 when the door body 30 is in an open state, the flip beam 9 is substantially perpendicular to the door body 30 .
  • the flip beam 9 When the door 30 is closed, the flip beam 9 is substantially parallel to the door 30 and closes the gap between the two doors 30 and the box 10 to effectively prevent cold air from overflowing.
  • the flip beam 9 includes a door swivel beam back cover, the door swivel beam back cover is rotationally connected to the door body 30 through a first door hinge and a second door hinge, and the door swivel beam back cover is connected to the two door hinges (i.e., the first door hinge).
  • the hinge and the second door hinge are respectively elastically connected by torsion springs.
  • the first door hinge is located above the second door hinge.
  • a guide block 13 is fixed on the top of the back cover of the door turning beam. The guide block 13 serves as a rotating component of the flip beam 9 and cooperates with the guide groove 14 to realize switching of different angles of the flip beam 9 relative to the door body 30 .
  • the first door hinge, the second door hinge and the back cover of the door swing beam are all provided with through holes for inserting torsion springs, and the torsion springs are used to connect the two door hinges to the back cover of the door swing beam respectively.
  • the first door hinge and the back cover of the door turn beam are connected through a first torsion spring
  • the second door hinge is connected to the back cover of the door turn beam through a second torsion spring.
  • the flip beam 9 is tightly attached to the side where the two door hinges are fixed to the lining of the door body 30 .
  • the two hinge axes move in the corresponding track grooves, and the door body 30 moves a certain distance to the outside relative to the hinge assembly, so that the force that causes the flipping beam 9 to flip will increase accordingly.
  • the movement of the door body 30 to the outside is offset (or partially), which may cause the guide block 13 on the top of the flip beam 9 to fail to complete the flip after entering the guide groove 14 and be stuck, so that the door body 30 cannot be completely closed. .
  • the torsion spring starts to stretch after reaching the critical value, and cooperates with the pressure of the groove wall of the guide groove 14 to quickly flip the flip beam 9 into place until the door body 30 is completely closed.
  • the torsion spring torque is released and reaches a relaxed state again.
  • the flip beam 9 contacts the seal provided on the door body 30, which can effectively prevent cold air from overflowing between the two door bodies 30.
  • the closing angle of the door 30 is G F , and G S > G F .
  • G ⁇ F 45°, that is, when the flipping beam 9 flips to 45°, the torsion spring critical value is reached.
  • G S is set to any value from 6° to 12°
  • G F is set to any value from 3° to 5°.
  • the closing force F W can only continue until the door body 30 is closed to the angle G F , that is, after the door body 30 is rotated and closed to the critical point of the torsion spring, even if the closing force F is removed W , the flipping beam 9 can also automatically complete the flipping.
  • the stopper part 403 interacts with the hook part 84, the hook part 84 elastically deforms, and the movable hook part 84 gradually enters the hook gap 404 ( That is, the stopper 403 enters the hook 84).
  • the elastic deformation amount of the hook portion 84 reaches the maximum deformation amount during the closing process of the door body 30.
  • the elastic energy stored in the elastic deformation of the hook part 84 is released, and together with the force of the stop part 403, the hook part 84 returns to the relaxed state, and drives the hook part 84 Further entering the hooking gap 404, the door 30 is automatically closed, and the lock hook 82 is locked with the stopper 403, thereby realizing the locking of the door 30 and the box 10.
  • G B0 G B1 .
  • G B0 is set to any value from 15° to 20°
  • G B1 is set to any value from 3° to 8°.
  • the door closing force F W can only continue until the door body 30 is closed to G B1 , that is, after the door body 30 is rotated and closed to the maximum elastic deformation of the hook portion 84, even if When the closing force F W is removed, the door body 30 can also automatically complete the flip.
  • the hook portion 84 undergoes elastic deformation under the joint action of the closing force F W and the stopper portion 403 .
  • the elastic deformation amount of the hook portion 84 reaches the maximum deformation amount during the closing process of the door body 30.
  • the elastic force of the hook part 84 is released, and the locking force F S , the elastic force of the hook part 84, the action force of the stop part 403 and the inertial force F G down, the door body 30 is quickly closed.
  • the closing process of separately arranging the rotating beam or the hooking portion 84 on the door body 30 has been described above; the following describes the closing process of setting the rotating beam and the hooking portion 84 on the door body 30 at the same time.
  • G B1 > G S is set, that is, when the door body 30 is closed to G B1 , that is, when the elastic deformation of the hook portion 84 reaches the maximum, the guide block 13 at the top of the flip beam 9 and the guide groove 14 No contact.
  • the closing force FW lasts from the initial closing to GB1 , that is, after the door 30 is closed to GB1 , the user can remove the closing force FW , and the door 30 will automatically close.
  • the guide block 13 contacts the guide groove 14, and in the process of the door body 30 continuing to close from GS to GF , the door body 30 is under locking force F S , hook
  • the elastic force of the hanging portion 84, the force of the stopper 403 and the inertial force FG are combined to close.
  • the flip beam 9 is closed under the combined action of the locking force FS , the inertial force FG and the pressure of the groove wall of the guide groove 14.
  • the torsion spring compresses in the radial direction.
  • the door body 30 When the door body 30 continues to be closed by G F , the door body 30 continues to close under the joint action of the locking force F S , the elastic force of the hook part 84, the force of the stop part 403 and the inertia force F G , and the flip beam 9 Under the combined action of the locking force F S , the turning force F N , the inertia force F G and the pressure of the groove wall of the guide groove 14 , it is quickly turned into place.
  • the guide block 13 at the top of the flip beam 9 has not yet contacted the guide groove 14.
  • the locking force F S generated by the lock hook structure and the inertial force F G of the door body 30 can be used to promote the flipping of the flipping beam 9 and reduce the offset of the flipping beam due to the rotation and outward movement of the door body 30 during the closing process of the door body 30 .
  • the flipping force causes the flipping beam 9 to fail to be effectively flipped into place.
  • the stopper and the locking structure after the door body 30 is closed and reaches G B1 the locking force F S continues to attenuate as the closing angle of the door body 30 decreases.
  • G B1 G S is set, that is, when the door body 30 is closed to G B1 (G S ), the elastic deformation of the hook portion 84 reaches the maximum value, and the guide block 13 begins to contact the guide groove 14.
  • it can Make full use of the locking force F S generated by the locking structure and the inertial force F G of the door body 30 to promote the flipping of the flipping beam 9 and reduce the rotation and outward movement of the door 30 during the closing process of the door 30 , causing the flipping beam 9 to flip. Due to the force, the flip beam 9 cannot be effectively flipped into place.
  • G B1 ⁇ [G S , G S +3°] can be set to prevent the flip beam 9 from being able to effectively flip into place after the door 30 is closed and reaches G B1 due to excessive attenuation of the locking force F S .
  • the first hinge axis 41 is located at the first contact positioning point relative to the first track groove 50, and the second hinge axis 42 The first contact guide point is located relative to the second track groove 60 .
  • the first hinge axis 41 is located at the second contact positioning point relative to the first track groove 50
  • the first hinge shaft 41 is located at the third contact positioning point relative to the first track groove 50
  • the second hinge axis 42 is located at the third contact guide point relative to the second track groove 60 .
  • the first contact positioning point, the second contact positioning point and the third contact positioning point are all located on the straight track segment of the first trajectory line S, and the first contact positioning point, the second contact positioning point, the third contact positioning point and the third contact positioning point A certain positioning point P 1 is arranged in a direction away from the door side wall 32 in sequence.
  • the first contact guide point, the second contact guide point, and the third contact guide point are all located on the second trajectory line K, and the first contact guide point, the second contact guide point, the third contact guide point, and the first guide point Q 1 are arranged in a direction close to the door front wall 31 and away from the door side wall 32 in sequence.
  • GF > G B1 is set, that is, when the door 30 is closed to GF , the flip beam 9 flips to the torsion spring critical value, and the elastic deformation of the hook portion 84 has not yet reached the maximum deformation.
  • the closing force F W starts from the closing of the door body 30 and continues to G B1 , that is, when the door body 30 is closed to G B1 , the closing force F W is removed, and the door body 30 can be automatically closed in place.
  • the door body 30 When the door body 30 continues to close from G F to G B1 , the door body 30 rotates under the combined action of the closing force F W , the elastic force of the hook part 84 and the force of the stop part 403, and the flip beam 9 closes the door. It turns over under the combined action of the force F W , the turning force F N and the pressure of the groove wall of the guide groove 14 .
  • the elastic deformation amount of the hook portion 84 reaches the maximum deformation amount.
  • the door body 30 When the door body 30 continues to be closed by G B1 , the door body 30 is closed under the joint action of the locking force F S , the elastic force of the hook portion 84 and the force of the stopper portion 403 .
  • the flipping beam 9 flips under the combined action of the locking force F S , the flipping force F N and the pressure of the groove wall of the guide groove 14 .
  • the stopper and the locking structure will continue to attenuate the flipping force F N when the door body 30 moves toward the outside after the door body 30 is closed and reaches G F. . And during the closing process of the door body 30, the stopper and the locking structure will continue to attenuate the locking force F S as the closing angle of the door body 30 decreases after the door body 30 closes and reaches G B1 .
  • G B1 ⁇ (G F , G F -1°] can be set to avoid excessive attenuation of the flip force F N and the locking force F S , so that the door body 30 can be quickly closed in place and the flip beam 9 can be quickly flipped in place. .
  • the first hinge axis 41 is located at the first contact positioning point relative to the first track groove 50
  • the second hinge axis 42 is located at the first contact guide point relative to the second track groove 60.
  • the first hinge shaft 41 is located at the third contact positioning point relative to the first track groove 50
  • the second hinge axis 42 is located at the third contact guide point relative to the second track groove 60 .
  • the first contact positioning point and the third contact positioning point are both located on the straight track segment of the first trajectory line S, and the third contact positioning point, the first contact positioning point and the first positioning point P1 are sequentially moved away from the door side wall 32 direction arrangement.
  • the first contact guide point and the third contact guide point are both located on the second trajectory line K, and the third contact guide point, the first contact guide point, and the first guide point Q1 are sequentially moved away from the door side wall 32 and closer to the door front.
  • the direction of the wall 31 is aligned.
  • the torsion spring and the hook part of the flip beam 9 start to deform synchronously to accumulate elastic energy, and then release the elastic energy one after another. In this way, the synchronization of the movement of the torsion spring and the hook part can be effectively improved, the time for the user to apply the closing force F W during the opening process of the door 30 is reduced, and the user's experience is improved.
  • G B1 G F , that is, when the door 30 is closed to G B1 , the elastic deformation of the hook portion 84 reaches the maximum deformation, and the flip beam 9 flips to the torsion spring critical value.
  • the closing force F W starts from the closing of the door body 30 and continues to G B1 ( GF ). That is, after the door body 30 is closed to G B1 , the closing force F W is removed and the door body 30 automatically closes in place.
  • the door body 30 When the door body 30 is closed from G B0 to G B1 , the door body 30 continues to close under the combined action of the closing force F W , the elastic force of the hook part 84 and the force of the stop part 403 , and the flip beam 9 closes the door.
  • the force F W and the pressure of the groove wall of the guide groove 14 work together to turn over, and the torsion spring is compressed to store elastic potential energy.
  • G B1 G F is set, that is, when the door body 30 is closed to G B1 ( GF ), when the elastic deformation of the hook portion 84 reaches the maximum deformation, the flip beam 9 flips to the torsion spring critical value, which can Make full use of the mutual promotion of the flip force F N and the locking force F S to quickly close the door 30 in place and the flip beam 9 to quickly flip in place to avoid offset by the outward movement of the door 30 during the closing process of the door 30 The force that promotes the flipping of the flipping beam 9 causes the flipping beam 9 to fail to flip effectively.
  • the stopper and the locking structure As mentioned above, during the closing process of the door body 30, the stopper and the locking structure, after the door body 30 is closed and reaches G B1 ( GF ), the door body 30 moves toward the outside during the closing process, causing the flipping force F N to continuously attenuate. . In addition, as the closing angle of the door body 30 decreases, the locking force F S continues to decrease.
  • the first hinge axis 41 is located at the first contact positioning point relative to the first track groove 50
  • the second hinge axis 42 is located at the first contact guide point relative to the second track groove 60 .
  • the first contact positioning point is located on the straight track segment of the first trajectory line S, and the first contact positioning point and the first positioning point P 1 are sequentially arranged in a direction away from the door side wall 32 .
  • the first contact guide point is located on the second trajectory line K, and the first contact guide point and the first guide point Q1 are arranged in a direction away from the door side wall 32 and close to the door front wall 31 in order.
  • the torsion spring and the hook part of the flip beam 9 begin to deform synchronously to accumulate elastic energy, and then release the elastic energy one after another, thereby effectively improving the synchronization of the movement of the torsion spring and the hook part.
  • the time for the user to apply the closing force F W during the opening process of the door 30 is reduced, thereby improving the user experience.
  • the arrangement of the eleventh embodiment is the same as that of the first to tenth embodiments.
  • the bisector of the dihedral angle formed by the third reference plane M 3 and the reference plane M 0 (which remains stationary) is the angle formed by the door front wall 31 and the door side wall 32 when the door body 30 is closed.
  • the angle bisector H That is, the angle bisector H when the door body 30 is closed is also the angle bisector between the third reference plane M 3 and the reference plane M 0 .
  • the angle bisector H moves with the door 30 relative to the box 10 .
  • the first side edge W of the door 30 when closed is located on the reference plane M 0 , that is, the third reference plane M 3 of the first side edge W of the door 30 when closed intersects with the reference plane M 0 Wire.
  • the first included angle ⁇ formed by the door front wall 31 and the door side wall 32 is 90°.
  • the positioning central axis P is located at the first positioning point P 1 of the first trajectory line S.
  • the angle between the line segment WP and the straight rail segment on the first trajectory line S is denoted as ⁇ (for example, ⁇ [0, ⁇ /2]).
  • the distance between the first side edge W and the straight line on the first trajectory line S is R, and R is a constant value.
  • the door body 30 When the door body 30 rotates open with the first hinge axis 41 (positioning center axis P) as the rotation axis, and when the door body 30 rotates to WP and is parallel to the second reference plane M2 , the first side edge W is parallel to the reference plane.
  • the intersection point of the linear trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S and the angular bisector H is marked as the second setting position A 2 .
  • the point on the first trajectory line S located on the side of the angle bisector H close to the door side wall 32 is marked as the first setting position A 1 .
  • the point on the straight trajectory segment of the first trajectory line S located on the side of the angle bisector H away from the door side wall 32 is marked as the third setting position A 3 .
  • the angle between WA 1 and the straight-line trajectory segment of the first trajectory line is denoted as ⁇ 1
  • the angle between WA 2 and the straight-line trajectory segment of the first trajectory line is denoted as ⁇ 2
  • the angle between WA 3 and the straight-line trajectory segment of the first trajectory line is denoted as ⁇ 2
  • the included angle is recorded as ⁇ 3 ; among them, ⁇ 1 > ⁇ 2 > ⁇ 3 .
  • E max R/sin ⁇ -Rcot ⁇ is an increasing function with respect to ⁇ ; it can be seen that E max ( ⁇ 1 )>E max ( ⁇ 2 )>E max ( ⁇ 3 ).
  • the first positioning point P 1 is set to be at the first setting position A 1 when the door body 30 is closed, if the door body 30 only performs rotational movement around the rotation axis (such as the first hinge axis 41 ), then During the rotation of the door body 30, the first side edge W has the largest distance beyond the reference plane M0 .
  • the first positioning point P1 is set to the third setting position A3 when the door body 30 is closed, if the door body 30 only performs rotational motion around the rotation axis (such as the first hinge axis 41), then the first side During the rotation of the door body 30, the distance of the edge W beyond the reference plane M0 is the smallest.
  • the distance between the first positioning point P 1 and the door side wall 32 is larger when the door body 30 is closed, and the door body 30 rotates and moves inward as shown. The smaller the displacement compensation.
  • the first hinge axis 41 can be disposed on the angle bisecting plane H.
  • the first positioning point P 1 of the first track groove 50 is relative to the angular bisector.
  • the position of H is different.
  • the distance between the door body 30 and the first reference plane M 1 is different.
  • the distance between the first positioning point P 1 of the first track groove 50 and the door side wall 32 increases, and the door body 30 is rotated and opened to 90°, the distance between the door body 30 and the first reference plane M 1 The greater the distance, the greater the maximum angle at which the door 30 can be opened.
  • the distance between the door front wall 31 and the reference plane M 0 is recorded as the first distance ⁇ .
  • the first distance ⁇ is recorded as a positive number.
  • the door 30 is located inside the reference plane M 0 , which facilitates the door 30 of the refrigerator 1 embedded in the cabinet 100 to be opened to a larger angle.
  • the positioning center axis P is close to the angle bisecting plane H to ensure the stability of the movement of the first hinge axis 41 relative to the door body 30
  • the door 30 is located inside the reference plane M 0 when opened 90°, which is beneficial to the door 30 of the refrigerator 1 embedded in the cabinet 100 being able to be opened to a larger angle.
  • the door front wall 31 is coplanar with the third reference plane M 3
  • the door side wall 32 is coplanar with the reference plane M 0
  • the angle bisector H is also the angle bisector of the angle between the door front wall 31 and the door side wall 32 .
  • the angle bisecting plane H is parallel to the third reference plane M3 .
  • the door front wall 31 is parallel or coplanar with the reference plane M 0 .
  • the opening angle of the door body 30 is any angle from 43° to 47°. That is, in this embodiment, any value of G 2 ⁇ [43°, 47°].

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Combustion & Propulsion (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Thermal Sciences (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Refrigerator Housings (AREA)
  • Hinges (AREA)

Abstract

提供一种冰箱，所述冰箱包括箱体、铰链组件和门体。所述铰链组件包括第一轨迹槽、第二轨迹槽、第一铰链轴和第二铰链轴。所述第一铰链轴与所述第一轨迹槽相配合。所述第二铰链轴与所述第二轨迹槽相配合。所述门体通过所述铰链组件连接所述箱体。在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至第二角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴相对所述第一轨迹槽沿直线向靠近所述门侧壁的方向移动，且在所述门体打开至所述第二角度时改变运动方向，所述第二铰链轴向靠近所述门侧壁并远离所述门前壁的方向移动。在所述门体由所述第二角度打开至第五角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴沿所述第一轨迹槽向靠近所述门前壁且靠近所述门侧壁的方向运动。

Description

冰箱
本申请要求于2022年6月30日提交的、申请号为202210756773.7的中国专利申请的优先权，以及于2022年6月30日提交的、申请号为202210757115.X的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本公开涉及家用电器技术领域，尤其涉及一冰箱。
背景技术
家庭生活中，冰箱已成为每个家庭必备的家电之一。出于对室内美观简洁的需求，越来越多的消费者会选择嵌入式冰箱。
嵌入式冰箱，就是把冰箱嵌入到与其配套的橱柜中，通过地脚、背板和顶板形成散热循环，因此，冰箱的左右两侧壁与橱柜的内侧壁之间可以留有较小的间隙。
发明内容
提供一种冰箱，包括箱体、铰链组件和门体。所述箱体包括相对设置的第一体侧壁和第二体侧壁。定义所述第一体侧壁所在的平面为基准平面，所述基准平面靠近所述箱体的一侧为内侧，所述基准平面远离所述箱体的一侧为外侧。所述铰链组件连接所述箱体，且靠近所述第一体侧壁。所述铰链组件包括第一轨迹槽、第二轨迹槽、第一铰链轴和第二铰链轴。所述第一轨迹槽和所述第二轨迹槽设于所述门体靠近所述铰链组件的端部。所述第一铰链轴与所述第一轨迹槽相配合，且相对所述第一轨迹槽可运动。所述第二铰链轴与所述第二轨迹槽相配合，且相对所述第二轨迹槽可运动。所述门体通过所述铰链组件连接所述箱体，以打开或关闭所述箱体。所述门体包括门前壁和门侧壁。所述门前壁为所述门体的远离所述箱体一侧壁。所述门侧壁为所述门体的靠近所述铰链组件的一侧壁。当所述门体处于关闭状态时，所述第二铰链轴相较于所述第一铰链轴更远离所述门侧壁且更靠近所述门前壁。在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至第二角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴相对所述第一轨迹槽沿直线向靠近所述门侧壁的方向移动，且在所述门体打开至所述第二角度时改变运动方向，所述第二铰链轴向靠近所述门侧壁并远离所述门前壁的方向移动。在所述门体由所述第二角度打开至第五角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴沿所述第一轨迹槽向靠近所述门前壁且靠近所述门侧壁的方向运动，以使所述门体在旋转的过程中向所述内侧移动。所述第五角度大于所述第二角度，且所述第二角度大于0°。
附图说明
为了更清楚地说明本公开中的技术方案，下面将对本公开一些实施例中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍，然而，下面描述中的附图仅仅是本公开的一些实施例的附图，对于本领域普通技术人员来讲，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。此外，以下描述中的附图可以视作示意图，并非对本公开实施例所涉及的产品的实际尺寸、方法的实际流程、信号的实际时序等的限制。
图1为根据一些实施例的冰箱的立体图；
图2为根据一些实施例的俯视图；
图3为根据一些实施例的冰箱的铰链组件的结构示意图；
图4为根据一些实施例的冰箱的右上角的铰链组件的爆炸图；
图5为根据一些实施例的冰箱在实施例一中门体处于关闭状态时铰链组件处的结构图；
图6为根据一些实施例的冰箱在实施例一中门体打开至
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000001
时铰链组件处的结构图；
图7为根据一些实施例的冰箱在实施例一中门体打开至
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000002
时铰链组件处的结构图；
图8为根据一些实施例的冰箱在实施例一中门体打开至
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000003
时铰链组件处的结构图；
图9为根据一些实施例的冰箱在实施例一中门体打开至
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000004
时铰链组件处的结构图；
图10为根据一些实施例的冰箱在实施例一中门体打开至
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000005
时铰组件链处的结构图；
图11为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中第一侧棱W及第二侧棱N相对铰链组件的运动轨迹示意图；
图12为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的运动情况示意图；
图13为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中门体打开至
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000006
时第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的位置示意图；
图14为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中门体打开至
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000007
时第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的位置示意图；
图15为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中门体打开至
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000008
时第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的位置示意图；
图16为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中门体打开至
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000009
时第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的位置示意图；
图17为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中门体打开至
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000010
时第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的位置示意图；
图18为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中第一铰链轴与第一轨迹槽的配合关系示意图；
图19为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中第二铰链轴与第一轨迹槽的配合关系示意图；
图20为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中门体处于关闭状态的局部视图；
图21为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一中门体打开至第一打开角度s时的的局部视图；
图22为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一门体打开至第三打开角度t时的的局部视图；
图23为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例一门体打开至最大角度时的的局部视图；
图24为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例二中滚子沿凸型曲线的运动情况示意图；
图25为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例三中门体关闭时第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的位置示意图；
图26为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例三中第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的运动情况示意图；
图27为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例三中门体由
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000011
至关闭过程中时第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的位置示意图；
图28为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例四中门体打开时翻转梁与箱体的相对位置示意图；
图29为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例四中门体打开时翻转梁与箱体在另一视角下的相对位置示意图；
图30为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例五中门体关闭时第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的位置关系示意图；
图31为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例五中门体挤压门封时第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的位置关系示意图；
图32为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例五中门体由关闭状态继续沿关闭方向运动时，中第一铰链轴相对第一轨迹槽、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽的位置关系示意图；
图33为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体上端与安装块的爆炸图；
图34为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体上端与安装块的另一种爆炸图；
图35为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体下端与安装块的爆炸图；
图36为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体下端与安装块的装配结构示意图；
图37为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体关闭状态时铰链板与锁定结构配合的立体图；
图38为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体关闭状态时铰链板与锁定结构配合的结构图；
图39为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体打开时铰链板与锁定结构的立体图；
图40为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体打开时铰链板与锁定结构的结构图；
图41为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体打开至90°时铰链板与锁定结构的立体图；
图42为根据一些实施例的冰箱实施例六中门体打开至90°时铰链板与锁定结构的结构图；
图43为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体打开至最大角度时铰链板与锁定结构的立体图；
图44为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例六中门体打开至最大角度时铰链板与锁定结构的结构图；
图45为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例七中门体打开至最大角度时第一铰链轴与第一轨迹槽相接触、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽相接触的相对位置示意图；
图46为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例七中门体打开至最大角度时第一铰链轴与第一轨迹槽相接触、第二铰链轴相对第二轨迹槽相接触的结构图；
图47为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例九中门体上端与安装块的爆炸图；
图48为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例九中门体上端与安装块的装配结构示意图；
图49为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例九中门体上端与安装块在另一视角下的装配结构示意图；
图50为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例九中门体上端与安装块的爆炸图；
图51为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例九中门体下端、轨迹块、锁定块的装配结构示意图；
图52为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例十中门体关闭至G B1时，门体下端、轨迹块、锁定块的结构图；
图53为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例十中门体关闭至G S时，门体、导向块及导向槽的相对位置示意图；
图54为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例十中门体关闭至G F时，门体、导向块及导向槽的相对位置示意图；
图55为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例十中G B1＞G S时的锁钩与止挡部、导向块与导向槽的状态说明图；
图56为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例十中G B1＜G F时的锁钩与止挡部、导向块与导向槽的状态说明图；
图57为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例十中G B1＝G F时的锁钩与止挡部、导向块与导向槽的状态说明图；
图58为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例十一中门体处于关闭状态时铰链处的结构示意图；
图59为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例十一中门体处于关闭状态、且第一定位点P 1位于角平分面H靠近门侧壁一侧时的铰链处的结构示意图；
图60为根据一些实施例的冰箱的实施例十一中门体处于关闭状态、且第一定位点P 1位于角平分面H远离门侧壁一侧时的铰链处的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本公开一些实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述，显然，所描述的实施例仅仅是本公开一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本公开所提供的实施例，本领域普通技术人员所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本公开保护的范围。
除非上下文另有要求，否则，在整个说明书和权利要求书中，术语“包括(comprise)”及其其他形式例如第三人称单数形式“包括(comprises)”和现在分词形式“包括(comprising)”被解释为开放、包含的意思，即为“包含，但不限于”。在说明书的描述中，术语“一个实施例(one embodiment)”、“一些实施例(some embodiments)”、“示例性实施例(exemplary embodiments)”、“示例(example)”、“特定示例(specific example)”或“一些示例(some examples)”等旨在表明与该实施例或示例相关的特定特征、结构、材料或特性包括在本公开的至少一个实施例或示例中。上述术语的示意性表示不一定是指同一实施例或示例。此外，所述的特定特征、结构、材料或特点可以以任何适当方式包括在任何一个或多个实施例或示例中。
以下，术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的，而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此，限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者 隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本公开实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。
在描述一些实施例时，可能使用了“耦接”和“连接”及其衍伸的表达。术语“连接”应做广义理解，例如，“连接”可以是固定连接，也可以是可拆卸连接，或成一体；可以是直接相连，也可以通过中间媒介间接相连。术语“耦接”表明两个或两个以上部件有直接物理接触或电接触。术语“耦接”或“通信耦合(communicatively coupled)”也可能指两个或两个以上部件彼此间并无直接接触，但仍彼此协作或相互作用。这里所公开的实施例并不必然限制于本文内容。
“A、B和C中的至少一个”与“A、B或C中的至少一个”具有相同含义，均包括以下A、B和C的组合：仅A，仅B，仅C，A和B的组合，A和C的组合，B和C的组合，及A、B和C的组合。
“A和/或B”，包括以下三种组合：仅A，仅B，及A和B的组合。
本文中“适用于”或“被配置为”的使用意味着开放和包容性的语言，其不排除适用于或被配置为执行额外任务或步骤的设备。
另外，“基于”的使用意味着开放和包容性，因为“基于”一个或多个所述条件或值的过程、步骤、计算或其他动作在实践中可以基于额外条件或超出所述的值。
如本文所使用的那样，“约”、“大致”或“近似”包括所阐述的值以及处于特定值的可接受偏差范围内的平均值，其中所述可接受偏差范围如由本领域普通技术人员考虑到正在讨论的测量以及与特定量的测量相关的误差(即，测量系统的局限性)所确定。
如本文所使用的那样，“平行”、“垂直”、“相等”包括所阐述的情况以及与所阐述的情况相近似的情况，该相近似的情况的范围处于可接受偏差范围内，其中所述可接受偏差范围如由本领域普通技术人员考虑到正在讨论的测量以及与特定量的测量相关的误差(即，测量系统的局限性)所确定。例如，“平行”包括绝对平行和近似平行，其中近似平行的可接受偏差范围例如可以是5°以内偏差；“垂直”包括绝对垂直和近似垂直，其中近似垂直的可接受偏差范围例如也可以是5°以内偏差。“相等”包括绝对相等和近似相等，其中近似相等的可接受偏差范围内例如可以是相等的两者之间的差值小于或等于其中任一者的5％。
在下文中，将参照附图详细描述本申请的实施方式。在附图中，定义冰箱使用时面向用户的一侧为前侧，与之相反的一侧为后侧。
实施例一
本公开的实施例一提供了一种冰箱1，参照图1，冰箱1包括具有储藏室的箱体10、连接到箱体10以打开和关闭储藏室的门体30，以及向储藏室供应冷空气的制冷装置。箱体10包括限定形成储藏室的内胆、连接到内胆的外侧以形成冰箱的外观的外壳、设置于在内胆与外壳之间以使储藏室绝热的隔热层。
箱体10限定出多个储藏室。在本实施例中，多个储藏室包括冷藏室及位于冷藏室下方的冷冻室。需要说明的是，冰箱1的多个储藏室的种类和设置不局限于此。
储藏室的前端形成有取放口，用户可以通过该取放口放置食物至储藏室内或由储藏室内取出食物。箱体10上设置可旋转的门体30以打开或关闭储藏室的取放口。例如，门体30由位于冰箱1的上部的铰链组件和位于冰箱1的下部的铰链组件可旋转地连接于箱体10上。
箱体10包括相对设置的第一体侧壁(即箱体10的左侧壁和右侧壁中的一者)和第二体侧壁(即箱体10的左侧壁和右侧壁中的另一者)。铰链组件设置于箱体10上且靠近第一体侧壁。
门体30具有在门体30关闭时远离箱体10的门前壁31、与门前壁31相对设置的门后壁33、靠近铰链组件且与门前壁31相连接的门侧壁32。
例如，当铰链组件位于箱体10的右侧时，门体30的右侧壁为门侧壁32。当铰链组件位于箱体10的左侧时，门体30的左侧壁为门侧壁32。
门体30的门前壁31和门侧壁32相交形成第一侧棱W，门侧壁32与门后壁33相交形成第二侧棱N。当门体30关闭时，第一侧棱W位于第二侧棱N的远离箱体10的一侧。
需要说明的是，门前壁31与门侧壁32均为平坦的壁面时，门前壁31所在的平面与门侧壁32所在的平面的相交线为理论上的第一侧棱W。门前壁31与门侧壁32相交处圆 角过渡的设置，形成一个沿门体30的高度方向(即如图1中所示的上下方向)延伸的曲面，为便于描述，以该曲面上任一条沿门体30的高度方向延伸的直线代表第一侧棱W。类似地，门后壁33与门侧壁32相交处圆角过渡设置，可以以门后壁33和门侧壁32各自所在平面的相交线代表第二侧棱N，或以与该相交线位置相近并与该相交线平行的直线来代表第二侧棱N。
如图2和图3所示，门体30的后壁上设有门封条5，当门体30关闭时，门封条5环绕取放口，且与箱体10的前端面相贴合，以有效密封门体30与箱体10的连接处，从而确保门体30密封取放口，避免冷气外溢。例如，门封条5呈环状。
参照图2至图4，铰链组件包括第一铰链轴41(即主铰链轴)、位于第一铰链轴41远离第一体侧壁一侧的第二铰链轴42(即辅铰链轴)。门体30的靠近铰链组件的端部设有第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60。第一铰链轴41适配于第一轨迹槽50，第二铰链轴42适配于第二轨迹槽60，在门体30旋转打开或者关闭的过程中，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50运动，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60运动。
铰链组件包括与箱体10固定连接的铰链板40，铰链板40包括与箱体10连接的连接部401、从连接部401向前侧延伸且呈水平板状的延伸部402。连接部401可以通过诸如螺钉、销和螺栓等紧固件与箱体10连接。
示例地，参见图4，对于位于门体30上端的铰链组件来说，铰链组件包括连接在箱体10上端的铰链板40，第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42连接在铰链板40上以形成引导门体30移动的限定轴。铰链板40、第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42可以一体地形成，亦可以被分开提供并彼此组装。其中，第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42设于延伸部402上，并竖直向下延伸。
对于位于门体30下端的铰链组件来说，连接部401连接在箱体10的前端面。第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42设置在铰链板40上，且向上延伸。
对应于铰链板40的位置，门体30的上下两端均设有第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60。示例地，位于门体30上下两端的两个第一轨迹槽50在冰箱1的高度方向上的位置相对应，两个第二轨迹槽60在在冰箱1的高度方向上的位置相对应，以使门体30上下两端部的运动保持一致，从而使门体30打开或关闭更为流畅。
在本实施例中，继续参照图2，将箱体10上靠近铰链板40的侧壁(即第一体侧壁)所在的平面定义为基准平面M 0，当冰箱1收容于橱柜100中时，定义基准平面M 0的靠近橱柜100的一侧为外侧，与之相对的靠近储藏室的一侧为内侧。
示例地，当门体30关闭时，门前壁31所在的平面与橱柜100的前端面所在的平面大致平齐(即，两平面之间的距离小于2mm)。为了将冰箱1放置在橱柜100中使用，通常会在橱柜100与冰箱1的第一体侧壁(即基准平面M 0)之间预留间隙α，例如，间隙α的宽度∈[3，5]，单位：mm。
可以理解的是，为使冰箱1的门体30可以正常打开，在门体30旋转的过程中，第一侧棱W不能超出基准平面M 0太多，以避免第一侧棱W与橱柜100碰撞而导致门体30无法正常打开。
综上所述，若门体30在旋转的过程中可以向所述内侧移动，则第一侧棱W不会超出基准平面M 0太多。例如，当铰链板40设在门体30右侧时，所述内侧为基准平面M 0的左侧，则门体30在旋转的过程中需要向左侧移动。当铰链板40设置在门体30的左侧时，所述内侧为基准平面M 0的右侧，则门体30需要在旋转的过程中向右侧移动。
在本实施例中，如图3所示，第一轨迹槽50包括相连通的直线槽段和曲线槽段，直线槽段位于曲线槽段的远离门侧壁32的一侧。
示例地，直线槽段向靠近门侧壁32的方向延伸，曲线槽段的一端连通直线槽段，且曲线槽段的另一端向靠近第一侧棱W的方向延伸。所述曲线槽段向第一侧壁N的方向凸起。例如，沿由门后壁33向门前壁31的方向，曲线槽段与门侧壁32的距离逐渐减小。这样，在门体30打开的过程中，门体30在旋转的同时先向所述内侧移动，再向前移动，从而可以避免门体30与橱柜100干涉，且可以避免门体30挤压门封条5，以减少门封条5的磨损。
示例地，所述直线槽段平行于门前壁31。
第一轨迹槽50的中心轨迹线记为第一轨迹线S，第一轨迹槽50由第一轨迹槽50的形状所限定。第一轨迹线S包括光滑过渡连接的直线轨迹段和曲线轨迹段。所述直线轨迹段向靠近门侧壁32的方向延伸，所述曲线轨迹段位于所述直线轨迹段的靠近门侧壁32的一侧，且向靠近第二侧棱N的方向凸起。
在本实施例中，所述直线轨迹段平行于门前壁31，所述曲线轨迹段设置为正圆弧。
第二轨迹槽60为曲线槽。第二轨迹槽60的一端较第二轨迹槽60的另一端更远离门后壁33且远离门侧壁32。第二轨迹槽60向靠近门后壁33的方向凸起。第二轨迹槽60的中心轨迹线记为第二轨迹线K。第二轨迹线K由第二轨迹槽60的形状限定，第二轨迹线K呈曲线状，并向靠近门后壁33的方向凸起。
示例地，沿由远离门侧壁32的一端指向门侧壁32的方向，第二轨迹线K与门前壁31的距离先增大后减少。
例如，第一轨迹槽50位于第二轨迹槽60靠近门前壁31和门侧壁32的一侧，以使得门体30能够在旋转的同时向所述内侧移动一定距离，从而对门体30旋转导致的第一侧棱W向所述外侧的位移进行补偿，以减小第一侧棱W超出基准平面M 0的距离，避免门体30打开时第一侧棱W与橱柜100相互干涉。
由于第一轨迹槽50和第一铰链轴41之间，以及第二轨迹槽60和第二铰链轴42之间是相对运动关系，若门体30在打开的过程中，以第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60为静止参照物，则相当于第一铰链轴41在第一轨迹槽50内移动，第二铰链轴42在第二轨迹槽60内移动。本公开为了描述方便，采用第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60为静止参照物，而第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42相对参照物移动的方式进行说明。
在本实施例中，第一铰链轴41的中心轴记为定位中心轴P，第二铰链轴42的中心轴为导向中心轴Q；在箱体10顶壁所在平面的投影内，线段PQ记为轴心线段PQ。
如图5至图10所示，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹槽50运动等同于定位中心轴P沿第一轨迹线S运动，第二铰链轴42沿第二轨迹槽60运动等同于导向中心轴Q沿第二轨迹线K运动，以使得门体30能够在旋转的同时向所述内侧移动一定距离，从而对门体30旋转导致的第一侧棱W向所述外侧的位移进行补偿，避免门体30打开时与橱柜100相互干涉。
由于第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42固定于铰链板40上，门体30相对箱体10的运动，等同于在箱体10顶壁所在的平面内(或与箱体10顶壁相平行的平面内)两者的相对运动。在箱体10顶壁所在平面内，轴心线段PQ相对设于门体30上的轨迹槽的运动等同于铰链板40相对于门体30的运动，亦等同于箱体10相对于门体30的运动。根据运动的相对性，可由箱体10相对门体30的运动情况得出门体30相对箱体10的运动情况。
以下说明中，为方便阐述，选择在箱体10顶壁所在平面内，轴心线段PQ相对门体30的运动表示箱体10(铰链板30)相对于门体30的运动。
如图5所示，第一轨迹线S包括远离门侧壁32的第一定位点P 1和靠近门侧壁32的第六定位点P 6。第一轨迹线S由第一定位点P 1先沿直线向靠近门侧壁32的方向延伸，再沿曲线延伸至第六定位点P 6。
示例地，第一轨迹线S由第一定位点P 1先沿直线向靠近门侧壁32的方向延伸，再沿曲线向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向延伸至第六定位点P 6。第一定位点P 1与门前壁31的距离记为D 1，第六定位点P 6与门前壁31之间的距离记为D 2，且D 1＞D 2。
示例地，第六定位点P 6位于第一定位点P 1靠近门侧壁32并远离门前壁31的一侧，即第一轨迹线S由第一定位点P 1先沿直线向靠近门侧壁32的方向延伸，再沿曲线向靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的方向延伸至第六定位点P 6。
以下，将以第一轨迹线S由第一定位点P 1先沿直线向靠近门侧壁32的方向延伸，再沿曲线向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向延伸至第六定位点P 6为例进行说明。
参见图5，第二轨迹线K包括远离门侧壁32的第一导向点Q 1和靠近门侧壁32的第六导向点Q 6。第六导向点Q 6位于第一导向点Q 1远离门前壁31且靠近门侧壁32的一侧，第二轨迹线K由第一导向点Q 1向远离门前壁31且靠近门侧壁32的方向沿曲线延伸至第六导向点Q 6。
第一导向点Q 1与门前壁31的距离记为Z 1，第六导向点Q 6与门前壁31之间的距离记为Z 2。示例地，Z 1＜D 2＜D 1＜Z 2。以上设置使第二轨迹槽60有效限定第二铰链轴42的移 动，以驱动第一铰链轴41在第一轨迹槽50内运动，从而在门体30打开的过程中使门体30向所述内侧移动一定距离，并确保门体30旋转打开的稳定性。
如图5所示，本实施例中，在门体30处于关闭状态时，第一铰链轴41的中心轴(定位中心轴P)位于第一轨迹线S的第一定位点P 1，第二铰链轴42的中心轴(导向中心轴Q)位于第二轨迹线K的第一导向点Q 1。即门体30处于关闭状态时，第一铰链轴41位于第二铰链轴42靠近门侧壁32且靠近门后壁33的一侧。
结合图5，门体30处于关闭状态，第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42在平行于门侧壁32方向的第一方向距离记为L 1＝D 1-Z 1，且2.5mm≤L 1≤10mm，第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42在垂直于门侧壁32方向的第二方向距离记为L 2，且7.5mm≤L 2≤30mm。例如，当L 1＝5mm，L 2＝15mm时，门体30厚度在44mm至53mm之间，使得门体30在开门的过程中，第一侧棱W超出基准平面M 0的距离较小，例如，该距离小于3mm。
例如，L 1为2.5mm、5mm、7.5mm或10mm，L 2为7.5mm、15mm、25mm或30mm。
在本实施例中，以冰箱打开的最大角度G max(即第五角度)＞90°为例进行说明。门体30由关闭状态打开至最大角度G max过程中，门体30旋转打开至不同的角度时，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50的相对位置、第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60的相对位置具体如下：
以下说明中，
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000012
表示门体30的打开角度，门体30关闭状态时打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000013
门体30相对箱体10打开以敞开取放口时的打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000014
为正数；
如图5所示，
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000015
时，门体30处于关闭状态；定位中心轴P位于第一轨迹线S的第一定位点P 1，导向中心轴Q位于第二轨迹线K的第一导向点Q 1。
如图6所示，
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000016
时，门体30由关闭状态打开至小于G 2的任一角度的过程，在该过程中，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段向靠近门侧壁32的方向移动，第二铰链轴42沿曲线状的第二轨迹线K向靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的方向移动。
以上，当门体30的打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000017
时，门体30的运动趋势保持不变；其区别在于：当门体30打开至不同角度时，第一铰链轴41相对于第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段的位置不同，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹线K的位置不同。
如此，当门体30的打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000018
时，选择0°至G 2范围内的任一个角度可以代表门体30打开至区间(0°，G 2)时，第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50、第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60的相对位置。如图6和图13所示，以
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000019
代表该打开角度区间内的位置，以与门体30打开至其它角度时进行对比。
如图6和图13所示，当门体30打开至G 1时，定位中心轴P位于第一轨迹线S的第二定位点P 2，第二定位点P 2位于第一定位点P 1靠近门侧壁32的一侧。导向中心轴Q位于第二轨迹线K的第二导向点Q 2，第二导向点Q 2位于第一导向点Q 1靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的一侧。
如图7和图14所示，当
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000020
时，门体30旋转打开至G 2。定位中心轴P位于第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段的第三定位点P 3，第三定位点P 3位于第二定位点P 2的靠近门侧壁32的一侧。第三定位点P 3为直线轨迹段靠近门侧壁32的端点，即第三定位点P 3为第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50沿直线向靠近门侧壁32的方向移动的终点。
导向中心轴Q位于第二轨迹线K的第三导向点Q 3，第三导向点Q 3位于第二导向点Q 2靠近门侧壁32并远离门前壁31的一侧。例如，G 2∈[26°，30°]中的任一值。综上所述，门体30由关闭状态打开至G 2的过程中，第一铰链轴41沿直线向靠近门侧壁32的方向移动，第二铰链轴42沿曲线向靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的方向移动。
如图8所示，
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000021
时，门体30由G 2打开至小于G 4的任一角度的过程，在该过程中，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向移动，第二铰链轴42沿第二轨迹线K向靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的方向移动。
以上，当门体30的打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000022
时，门体30的运动趋势保持不变；其区别在于：当门体30的打开角度不同时，第一铰链轴41相对于第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段的位置不同，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹线K的位置不同。类似地，当门体30的打开角 度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000023
内时，选择G 2至G 4范围内的任一个打开角度，可以代表门体30打开至该区间时，第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50、第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60的相对位置。例如，如图15所示，以
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000024
代表门体30打开至该角度区间内的位置，以与门体30打开至其它角度时进行对比。
参见图8和图15，当门体30打开至G 3时，定位中心轴P位于第一轨迹线S的第四定位点P 4，第四定位点P 4位于第三定位点P 3靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的一侧；导向中心轴Q位于第二轨迹线K的第四导向点Q 4，第四导向点Q 4位于第三导向点Q 3靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的一侧。例如，G 3∈[43°，47°]中的任一值；本实施例中，设置G 3＝45°。
如图9和图16所示，当
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000025
时，门体30旋转打开至G 4。定位中心轴P位于第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段的第五定位点P 5，第五定位点P 5位于第四定位点P 4靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的一侧。导向中心轴Q位于第二轨迹线K的第五导向点Q 5，第五导向点Q 5位于第四导向点Q 4靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的一侧。例如，G 4∈[88°，92°]中的任一值。
在本实施例中，
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000026
当门体打开至90°时，所述第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50所在位置位于门体30关闭时第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50所在位置靠近门侧壁32的一侧；即第五定位点P 5位于第一定位点P 1靠近门侧壁32的一侧。
如图10所示，当
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000027
时，门体30由G 4旋转打开至G max，在该过程中，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向移动，第二铰链轴42沿第二轨迹线K向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向移动。在本实施例中，G max＝116°。
以上，当门体30的打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000028
时，门体30的运动趋势保持不变；当门体30打开至G 4至G max之间的不同角度时，第一铰链轴41相对于第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段的位置不同，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹线K的位置不同。
类似地，当门体30的打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000029
时，选择该区间中任一个打开角度可以代表门体30打开至该区间时的第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50、第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60的相对位置例如，如图17所示，以
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000030
代表门体30在该打开角度区间内的位置，以与门体30打开至其它状态时进行对比。
当门体30打开至G max＞90°时，定位中心轴P位于第一轨迹线S的第六定位点P 6，第六定位点P 6位于第五定位点P 5靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的一侧。导向中心轴Q位于第二轨迹线K的第六导向点Q 6，第六导向点Q 6位于第五导向点Q 5靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的一侧。
在本实施例中，0°＜G 1＜G 2＜G 3＜G 4＜G max。第一定位点P 1、第二定位点P 2、第三定位点P 3、第四定位点P 4、第五定位点P 5、第六定位点P 6依次沿第一轨迹线S分布。且第二定位点P 2、第三定位点P 3、第四定位点P 4沿直线轨迹段向靠近门侧壁32的方向分布，第四定位点P 4、第五定位点P 5、第六定位点P 6沿曲线轨迹段向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向分布。
第一导向点Q 1、第二导向点Q 2、第三导向点Q 3、第四导向点Q 4、第五导向点Q 5、第六导向点Q 6依次沿第一轨迹线S分布。且第二导向点Q 2、第三导向点Q 3、第四导向点Q 4、第五导向点Q 5沿第二轨迹线K向靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的方向分布，第五导向点Q 5、第六导向点Q 6沿第二轨迹线K向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向分布。需要说明的是，本实施例中，G 1、G 2、G 3、G 4、G max依次记为第一角度、第二角度、第三角度、第四角度和最大角度。
综上所述，在门体30从关闭状态打开至最大角度G max的过程中，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50始终移动，且始终向靠近门侧壁32的方向移动，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60始终移动，且始终向靠近门侧壁32的方向移动，即门体30打开的整个过程中，第一铰链轴41与第二铰链轴42均保持单向移动，而不发生换向，从而使第一铰链轴41与第二铰链轴42的受力方向始终保持一致，有利于提高门体30开关的手感，提高用户体验，延长第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60的使用寿命。另外，在门体30打开的过程中，第一铰链轴41与第二铰链轴42保持运动，使门体30的加速度变化较小，有利于提高门体30开启时的流畅度。
需要说明的是，本公开的一些实施例不局限于以上的设置，在一些实施例中，在门体30由G 4打开至G max的过程中，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60向靠近门侧壁32的方向移动，而第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50撤回，即，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50向远离门侧壁32的方向移动。
例如，第六定位点Q 6位于第五定位点Q 5靠近门侧壁32的一侧，在门体30打开的过程中，导向中心轴Q移动至第五定位点Q 5后，随着门体30继续打开，导向中心轴Q继续向靠近门侧壁32的方向移动至第六定位点Q 6，定位中心轴P沿第一轨迹线S向远离门侧壁32的方向移动至第六定位点Q 6。
可以理解的是，结合门体30打开至特定角度(包括第一角度G 1、第二角度G 2、第三角度G 3、第四角度G 4和最大角度G max)时，两个铰链轴相对于两个轨迹槽的位置可知，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60的配合关系包括以下情况。
当门体30的打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000031
时，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹槽50的直线轨迹段移动。当门体30的打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000032
时，第一铰链轴41移动至第一轨迹槽50的直线轨迹段的靠近门侧壁32的端点处(即第三定位点P 3)。当门体30的打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000033
时，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹槽50的曲线轨迹段移动。
当门体30的打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000034
(如G 4＝90°)时，第二铰链轴42沿第二轨迹槽60向靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的方向移动。当门体30打开角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000035
时，第二铰链轴42沿第二轨迹槽60向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向移动。
综上，根据第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42的运动轨迹，
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000036
及
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000037
可以将门体30由关闭状态打开至G max的过程划分为三个阶段。以下，从第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60的配合关系角度对该三个阶段的相对移动情况进行说明。
在第一阶段中，如图14所示，门体30由关闭状态旋转打开至G 2。
示例地门体30由0°经由G 1打开至G 2。在该过程中，定位中心轴P由第一定位点P 1沿第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段向靠近门侧壁32的方向移动；导向中心轴Q由第一导向点Q 1沿第二轨迹线K向靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的方向移动。
例如，定位中心轴P由第一定位点P 1沿第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段经过第二定位点P 2移动至第三定位点P 3；导向中心轴Q由第一导向点Q 1沿第二轨迹线K经过第二导向点Q 2移动至第三导向点Q 3。
参见图14，在第一阶段中，以第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60为参照物，在门体30由0°打开至G 2的过程中时，轴心线段PQ从P 1Q 1处顺时针旋转并向所述外侧依次移动至P 2Q 2、P 3Q 3处(即P 1Q 1→P 2Q 2→P 3Q 3)。
由于第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60设置于门体30上，轴心线段PQ代表设置于箱体10上的铰链板40的移动。因此，若以门体30为静止参照物，则在门体30由关闭状态打开至G 2的过程中，箱体10(或，铰链板40)相对于门体30保持顺时针旋转并向所述外侧移动一定距离。根据运动的相对性，当以箱体10为静止参照物(或者，以铰链板40为静止参照物)时，在门体30由关闭状态打开至G 2的过程中，门体30(或者，第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60)相对于箱体10逆时针旋转，并向所述内侧移动一定距离。
也就是说，门体30在打开的同时，向所述内侧移动一定距离，从而可以对门体30旋转导致的第一侧棱W向所述外侧的位移进行补偿，避免门体30与橱柜100干涉。
在第二阶段中，如图15和图16所示，门体30由G 2旋转打开至G 4。
门体30由G 2经过G 3打开至G 4。在该过程中，定位中心轴P由第三定位点P 3沿第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向移动，且导向中心轴Q由第三导向点Q 3沿第二轨迹线K向靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的方向移动。
例如，定位中心轴P由第三定位点P 3沿第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段经过第四定位点P 4移动至第五定位点P 5；导向中心轴Q由第三导向点Q 3沿第二轨迹线K经过第四导向点Q 4移动至第五导向点Q 5。
在第三阶段，如图17所示，门体30由G 4旋转打开至G max。
在该过程中，定位中心轴P由第五定位点P 5沿第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段向靠近门 侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向移动，且导向中心轴Q由第五导向点Q 5沿第二轨迹线K向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向移动。
例如，定位中心轴P由第五定位点P 5沿第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段移动至第六定位点P 6；导向中心轴Q由第五导向点Q 5沿第二轨迹线K移动至第六导向点Q 6。
结合第二阶段和第三阶段中，第一铰链轴41与第二铰链轴42的运动轨迹，在门体30由G 2旋转打开至G max的过程中，以第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60为静止参照物，轴心线段PQ从P 3Q 3处沿顺时针方向旋转并向所述外侧依次经由P 4Q 4和P 5Q 5、移动至P 6Q 6处(即，P 3Q 3→P 4Q 4→P 5Q 5→P 6Q 6)。
可以理解的是，由于第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60设置于门体30上，轴心线段PQ代表设置于箱体10上的铰链板40的移动。因此，若以门体30为静止参照物，则在门体30由G 2打开至G max的过程中，箱体10(或铰链板40)相对于门体30保持顺时针旋转并向所述外侧移动。
根据运动的相对性，当以箱体10为静止参照物(或者，以铰链板40为静止参照物)时，在门体30由G 2打开至G max的过程中，门体30(或者，第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60)相对于箱体10逆时针旋转并向所述内侧移动。也就是说，门体30在打开的同时向所述内侧移动了一定距离。
以上第二阶段与第三阶段的打开过程中，门体30由G 2旋转打开至G max，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹槽50的曲线轨迹段运动。
综上，在门体30由关闭状态打开至G max的过程中，门体30绕一动态变化的点旋转从而使门体30向所述内侧移动。另外，以箱体10为静止参照物，门体30始终具有向所述内侧移动的趋势，以对门体30旋转导致的第一侧棱W向所述外侧的位移进行补偿，从而可以避免门体30打开时与橱柜100相互干涉。
在本实施例中，在门体30由关闭状态打开至G max的过程中，相对于门体30关闭时第一铰链轴41的中心轴P所在位置，门体30始终向所述内侧运动。即，当以第一铰链轴41为静止参照物时，在门体30由关闭状态打开至G max的过程中，门体30相对于第一铰链轴41的中心轴P始终向所述内侧运动。
将以门体30(或，第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60)为静止参照物时，门体30关闭时第一铰链轴41所在位置记为第一初始位置，那么，在门体30由关闭状态打开至G max的过程中，第一铰链轴41与所述第一初始位置的距离逐渐增大。即，在门体30由关闭状态打开至G max的过程中，第一铰链轴41相对门体30始终向靠近门侧壁32的方向运动。
示例地，在门体30由G 2旋转打开至G max的过程中，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段向靠近门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向运动，门体30每旋转打开单位角度，第一铰链轴41向靠近门前壁31的方向运动的速率与其向靠近门侧壁32的方向运动的速率近似相等(即，两个速率差小于1mm)。
在一些实施例中，在第一阶段中，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹槽50的直线槽段作直线运动，门体30每旋转打开单位角度向所述内侧移动距离为ξ 1。在第二阶段和第三阶段中，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹槽50的曲线槽段作曲线运动，门体30每旋转打开单位角度向所述内侧移动距离为ξ 2。例如，ξ 1＞ξ 2。
如此一来，在门体30打开的第一阶段内，门体30每打开单位角度向所述内侧移动的距离大，从而使门体30在第一阶段中可以快速地足量地向所述内侧位移，以有效补偿第一侧棱W因门体30旋转而导致的向所述外侧的位移，避免第一侧棱W与橱柜100相干涉。
在第一阶段中，第一铰链轴41快速地向靠近门侧壁32的方向移动，使门封条5与箱体10的前端面快速分离，从而可以有效地减少对门封条5的挤压。另一方面，具有以上轨迹特征的轨迹槽的排布更为紧凑，运动效率更高。
在本实施例中，冰箱的门体30向所述内侧移动的本质是第一轨迹槽50向所述内侧发生移动，因此，在第一阶段中，第一轨迹槽50的横向运动的效率高，门体30向内运动的快，有利于降低轨迹槽的设计排布的难度。
在一些实施例中，如图3所示，门封条5包括靠近门侧壁32的侧封条5a，当门体30关闭时，所述第一初始位置与门侧壁32所在的平面的距离大于侧封条5a与门侧壁32所在的平面的距离。
在一些实施例中，在门体30由关闭状态打开至G 1的过程中，门体30每旋转单位角度，第一铰链轴41的中心轴与侧封条5a的远离门侧壁32的边沿的距离变化量记为ζ 1；在门体30由G 1打开至G 2的过程中，门体30每旋转单位角度，第一铰链轴41的中心轴与侧封条5a的远离门侧壁32的边沿的距离变化量记为ζ 2；例如，ζ 1＞ζ 2。
即门体30由关闭状态打开至G 1的过程中、第一铰链轴41的中心轴与侧封条5a的远离门侧壁32的边沿的距离变化率大于门体30由G 1打开至G 2的过程中第一铰链轴41的中心轴与侧封条5a的远离门侧壁32的边沿的距离变化率。即，门体30由关闭状态打开至G 1的运动过程，第一铰链轴41的中心轴与侧封条5a远离门侧壁32的边沿的横向距离快速变短。相对于门体30由关闭状态打开至G 1的运动过程，门体30由G 1打开至G 2的过程中第一铰链轴41的中心轴与侧封条5a的远离门侧壁32的边沿的横向距离减小速度变慢。
以上设置中，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50的直线轨迹段运动时先快速移动，从而可以有效减小门体30打开过程中，侧封条5a在垂直于取放口所在平面方向的压缩量，减少对侧封条5a的挤压，亦减少门体30打开时的阻力。另外，门体30从由关闭状态打开至G 1的第一打开阶段向由G 1打开至G 2的第二打开阶段的过度更加自然，门体30不会发生跳动，流畅度更高。
在一些实施例中，第二轨迹槽60的第二轨迹线K在第一打开阶段和第二打开阶段的曲率变化一致。即，第一轨迹线K上的曲线段Q 1Q 2与曲线段Q 2Q 3的曲率变化一致。
例如，第二轨迹槽60为类椭圆弧槽，同时，第二轨迹线K为类椭圆弧。需要说明的是，类椭圆弧槽为具有类似椭圆弧形状的中心轨迹线(第二轨迹线K)的槽。类似椭圆弧包括标准椭圆弧(或标准椭圆的一部分)，亦包括因加工制造或装配误差或轻微变形等形成的与标准椭圆弧有所偏差但仍具有椭圆弧轨迹特征的非标准椭圆弧。即，中心轨迹线能够近似作为椭圆弧的槽即为类椭圆弧槽。
在一些实施例中，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹槽50的直线槽段作直线运动阶段(即，第一阶段)，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50的直线槽段的平均运动速度记为第一平均速度ν 1。第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹槽50的曲线槽段作曲线运动阶段(即，第二阶段和第三阶段)，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50的曲线槽段的平均运动速度记为第二平均速度ν 2。例如，ν 1＞ν 2。
即，门体30由关闭状态打开至第二角度G 2的过程中，第一铰链轴41的平均运动速度大于门体30由第二角度G 2打开至最大角度G max的过程中第一铰链轴41的平均运动速度。以上设置，使门体30在第二阶段和第三阶段中的运动速度减小，从而使门体可以快速打开，且可以防止大力开门时，铰链轴对轨迹槽造成冲击，从而有利于延长轨迹槽的使用寿命。
在一些实施例中，设置G 2＝45°，即门体30由关闭状态打开至45°时，第一铰链轴41沿直线运动，第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42共同作用，使门体30产生横向位移，即向所述内侧移动。在门体30由关闭状态打开至45°的过程中，门体30以向所述内侧移动为主。示例地，第一轨迹槽50的直线槽段与门前壁31平行，以提高门体30向所述内侧移动的效率。
在门体30的打开过程中，门体30靠近取放口所在平面的点，与取放口所在平面之间的距离值记为最小距离L min；当门体30打开至角度
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000038
时，最小距离为
Figure PCTCN2022129650-appb-000039
而当门体30打开至90°时，最小距离L min(90°)最大，也就是说，当门体30打开至90°时，门体30与取放口所在平面之间的最小距离值L min(90°)最大。在本实施例中，门体30打开至90°时，门侧壁32与取放口所在平面近似平行(门侧壁32与取放口所在平面之间夹角小于3°)。
当门体30安装于橱柜100内时，在门体30由90°向最大角度G max打开的过程中，若门体30仅以固定的第一铰链轴41的中心轴为旋转轴作旋转运动，受橱柜100的限制，门体30所能打开的最大角度记为G` max。
在本实施例中，由于门体30打开至90°时，门侧壁32与取放口所在平面平行，门前壁31与基准平面M 0近似平行。门体30由90°向最大角度G max打开的过程中，第一铰链轴41向靠近第一侧棱W的方向(即，靠近门前壁31且靠近门侧壁32的方向)运动，则门体30具有向所述内侧且向前侧(远离取放口的一侧)运动的趋势，即门体30向远离橱柜100和箱体10的方向运动。
在本实施例中，当冰箱安装于橱柜100内时，由于橱柜100的限制，门体30可以打开的最大角度记为G max，门体30由90°向最大角度G max的过程中向所述内侧且向前侧运动，以减少橱柜100对门体30的限制作用，从而可以增大门体30所能打开的最大角度，即，G max＞G` max。
而当冰箱不嵌入橱柜100时，门体30的打开不受橱柜100的限制；例如，门体30能够打开的最大角度为G max+△G，其中，△G＞0°。例如，G max为90°至105°中的任一值，△G为8°至12°中的任一值。
在一些实施例中，当门体30关闭时，门体30的门侧壁32位于基准平面M 0的靠近橱柜100的一侧，即位于基准平面M 0的所述外侧。
由于箱体10在发泡过程中，容易导致箱体10出现鼓起而使正面(即前侧面)不美观。为了确保外观上的美观，门体30关闭时，设置门侧壁32位于基准平面M 0的外侧，从而可以对箱体10进行遮挡。在本实施例中，门体30关闭时，门侧壁32所在的平面与基准平面M 0之间的距离记为α`，α`设置为1mm～2mm其中任一值。
示例地，当门体30打开至90°时，门封条5远离门前壁31的表面所在的平面与基准平面M 0近似平行。需要说明的是，在本公开中，若两平面的夹角小于3°，则可以将两平面的两面关系看做是“平行”或“近似平行”，即“近似平行”包括数学定义上的平行、亦包括夹角大于0°小于3°的两面关系。
在本实施例中，参见图3，门封条5包括靠近门侧壁32的侧封条5a，门封条5(或侧封条5a)的靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的棱记为侧封棱F。门封条5远离门前壁31的表面所在平面与第一体侧壁的夹角记为第二夹角γ。
在门体30由90°继续向最大角度G max打开的过程中，第二夹角γ呈增大趋势；且侧封棱F逐渐远离门体30打开至90°时门封条5远离门前壁31的表面所在的平面。
即，在门体30由90°继续向最大角度G max打开的过程中，门封条5远离门前壁31的表面所在平面与第一体侧壁的夹角单调递增，且侧封棱F与门体30打开至90°时门封条5远离门前壁31的表面所在平面之间的距离单调增大。
另外，在门体30由90°继续向最大角度G max打开的过程中，第二侧棱N相较于侧封棱F更靠近基准平面M 0。即随着门体30由90°向最大角度G max打开过程中打开角度的增大，门封条5对取放口的遮挡逐渐减小，门体30对取放口的遮挡逐渐减小。
以上设置，使安装于橱柜100内的冰箱1的门体30可以打开至更大角度(如大于90°)，以便于用户取放储藏于门体30的搁架上的物品，且可以减少门体30对取放口的遮挡，从而可以增大安装于储藏室内的抽屉的尺寸，增大储藏室的空间利用率。
示例地，冰箱1安装于橱柜100内，当门体30打开至最大角度G max时，门前壁31与橱柜100相接触。在此情况下，在箱体10的顶壁所在平面的投影中，侧封棱F与第二侧棱N所确定的直线与门体30打开至90°时门封条5远离门前壁31的表面所在平面近似平行。
即，当门体30打开至最大角度G max时，门封条5靠近门侧壁并远离门前壁的侧封棱F与门体30的第二侧棱N所在直线与门体打开至90°时门封条5远离门前壁31的表面所在平面之间的夹角为0°至3°中的任一值。以上限定，可以避免因第二侧棱N的旋转移动而增加门体30对取放口的遮挡量，亦可以增大门体30能够打开的最大角度G max。
在本实施例中，当门体30打开至90°时，门封条5远离门前壁31的表面所在的平面记为第四参考平面M 4，第四参考平面M 4相对箱体10保持静止，其不随门体30运动而运动。当门体30打开至最大角度G max时，第二侧棱N位于第四参考平面M 4与基准平面M 0之间；即第二侧棱N与第四参考平面M 4之间的距离大于0。
即，当门体30打开至最大角度G max时，第二侧棱N位于第四参考平面M 4与基准平面M 0之间。即第二侧棱N与第四参考平面M 4之间的距离大于0。示例地，当门体30打开至最大角度G max时，门封棱F位于第二侧棱N与第四参考平面M 4之间。
综上所述，如图10所示，当门体30打开至最大角度G max时，在箱体10顶壁所在平面的投影内，第二侧棱N位于侧封棱F远离第四参考平面M 4的一侧，投影点F和投影点N所确定的直线FN与第四参考平面M 4的夹角小于15°。或者，直线FN与第四参考平面M 4近似平行(夹角小于3°)。
示例地，如图5至图11所示，门体30具有第二侧棱N和第一侧棱W，在门体30相对箱体10处于关闭状态时，第二侧棱N相较于第一侧棱W更靠近箱体10。
本实施例中还进一步定义了第一参考平面M 1和第二参考平面M 2。参见图11所示，第一参考平面M 1为与基准平面M 0相平行并与取放口所在的平面垂直的平面，第一参考平面M 1位于基准平面M 0的所示外侧，且两平面之间的距离为α，即，第一参考平面M 1为橱柜100靠近箱体10的内壁所在平面。第二参考平面M 2为储藏间的取放口所在平面。
第一参考平面M 1和第二参考平面M 2是相对于箱体10保持静止的参考平面。也就是说，第一参考平面M 1和第二参考平面M 2在门体30相对箱体10的打开过程中，并不会随门体30的运动而运动。需要说明的是，第二参考平面M 2为箱体10所限定的取放口所在平面，其不因箱体取放口处设置可变形的门封等其他部件而移动。
在门体30从关闭状态打开至最大角度G max的过程中，所述第一侧棱W先向靠近第一参考平面M 1且靠近第二参考平面M 2的方向移动，再向远离所述第一参考平面M 1且靠近所述第二参考平面M 2的方向移动。第二侧棱N先向远离第一参考平面M 1且靠近第二参考平面M 2的方向移动，再向远离第一参考平面M 1且远离第二参考平面M 2的方向移动。
以上，在门体30从关闭状态打开至最大角度G max的过程中，第一侧棱W移动所形成的曲线轨迹为光滑曲线，第二侧棱N移动所形成的曲线轨迹为光滑曲线。
在门体30由关闭状态打开至第二角度G 2的过程中，第一侧棱W的运动方向与第一参考平面M 1所形成的第一方向夹角呈减小趋势，第二侧棱N的运动方向与第二参考平面M 2所形成的第二方向夹角呈减小趋势。
在门体30由第二角度G 2打开至最大角度G max≥90°的过程中，第一侧棱W的运动方向与第一参考平面M 1所形成的第三方向夹角呈增大趋势；第二侧棱N的运动方向与第二参考平面M 2所形成的第四方向夹角亦呈增大趋势。
在门体30由关闭状态打开至90°的过程中，侧封棱F向远离第一参考平面M 1和第二参考平面M 2的方向移动(始终保持)。在门体30由90°打开至最大角度G max的过程中，侧封棱F向靠近第一参考平面M 1且远离第二参考平面M 2的方向移动；即，当门体30打开至90°时，侧封棱F与第一参考平面M 1的距离达到最大值。
示例地，在门体30由关闭状态打开至最大角度G max的过程中，侧封棱F的运动轨迹近似为圆弧。即在门体30打开过程中，侧封棱F近似作圆弧运动。需要说明的是“近似圆弧”包括数学定义的标准圆弧，亦包括与标准圆弧存在较小偏差的弧线。例如，该较小偏差限定在1mm内。
在一些实施例中，如图18和图19所示，第一铰链轴41远离铰链板40的端面与第一轨迹槽50的槽底之间具有第一间隙J 1；第一间隙J 1为1.5mm～3.5mm其中任一值。第二铰链轴42远离铰链板40的端面与第二轨迹槽60的槽底之间具有第二间隙J 2；第二间隙J 2为1.5mm～2.5mm其中任一值。
铰链轴与轨迹槽装配时，预留公差±1mm。以上设置有利于生产制造及工艺调整。在产品装配时，门体30容易出现上下端不齐的情况，需要在铰链轴与轨迹槽之间安装垫片进行调整。
示例地，第一间隙J 1为2mm，第二间隙J 2≥第一间隙J 1，这样，门体30在上移时，先与第一铰链轴41接触，从而可以提高稳定性。例如，第二间隙J 2＝第一间隙J 1＝2mm，这样，门体30在上移时，与第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42同时接触。
在一些实施例中，门体30打开时，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50的移动方向记为第一位移方向；第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60的移动方向记为第二位移方向，第一位移方向与所述第二位移方向的夹角记为位移夹角ω；在门体由关闭状态打开至90°的过程中，位移夹角ω保持不变或在预设的范围内变化。例如，在门体由关闭状态打开至90°的过程中，位移夹角ω的变化量在0°至8°的范围内。
以上设置使位移夹角在较小的范围内波动，即保持相对恒定，这样，当用户用恒定的力(约5N)开门时，铰链轴(第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42)所受反作用力(即铰链轴在运动过程中，所受到力的总和)的变化不大，从而可以有效减少轨迹槽的磨损。
在一些实施例中，门体30在打开的过程中，围绕变动的点转动，且该变动点有迹可寻，其轨迹为(X，Y)。
其中，X＝(X1+X2+X3+X4)/4，Y＝(Y1+Y2+Y3+Y4)/4。
X代表变动点距门侧壁32的距离；Y代表变动点距门前壁31的距离。
X1代表门体关闭时第一铰链轴41在第一轨迹槽50内的中心点距门侧壁32的距离；X2代表门体关闭时第二铰链轴42在第二轨迹槽60内的中心点距门侧壁32的距离；X3代表门体旋转打开时第一铰链轴41在第一轨迹槽50内的中心点距门侧壁32的距离；X4代表门体旋转打开时第二铰链轴42在第二轨迹槽60内的中心点距离门侧壁32的距离。
Y1代表门体关闭时第一铰链轴41在第一轨迹槽50内的中心点距门前壁31的距离；Y2代表门体关闭时第二铰链轴42在第二轨迹槽60内的中心点距门前壁31的距离；Y3代表门体旋转打开时第一铰链轴41在第一轨迹槽50内的中心点距门前壁31的距离；Y4门体旋转打开时第二铰链轴42在第二轨迹槽60内的中心点距门前壁31的距离。
参照图20，第一铰链轴41在第一轨迹槽50内的中心点为定位中心轴P，第二铰链轴42在第二轨迹槽60内的中心点为导向中心轴Q；门体关闭时点P距门侧壁32的距离为a，点P距门前壁31的距离为b，点P与点Q之间距离为L，PQ的连线与第二参考平面M 2之间呈夹角m。
以下以第一轨迹线K的直线轨迹段的长度为K`，曲线轨迹段为圆弧(半径为R)为例进行说明。直线轨迹段与曲线轨迹段在点P 2处相连且曲线轨迹段与直线轨迹段相切，当第一铰链轴41运动到点P 2时，门体30的旋转角度为第二打开角度s，第一铰链轴41在门体旋转到第三打开角度t时在第一轨迹槽50内回撤。
需要与说明的是，第二打开角度s对应于实施例一中的第二角度G 2；在本实施例中，为了表示方便，用s来表示。第三打开角度t与任一实施例中的第三角度G 3不存在对应关系。
当门体30处于关闭状态时，点P的位置为(a，b)，点P 2的位置为(a+L*cosm，b-L*sinm)。
参照图21，①当门体的旋转角度为n，且0≤n≤s，点P移动距离为k(0＜k≤K`)时：
旋转前点P的位置：X1＝a，Y1＝b；
旋转前点Q的位置：X2＝a+L*cosm，Y2＝b-L*sinm；
旋转后点P的位置：X3＝a+k*cosn，Y3＝b-k*sinn；
旋转后点Q的位置：X4＝a+k*cosn+L*cos(n+m)，Y4＝b-k*sinn-sin(n+m)。
参照图22，②当门体的旋转角度为n，且s≤n≤t，可求点P旋转前后距离为2R*[sin(n-s)/2]；
旋转后点P的位置：X3＝a，Y3＝b；
旋转后点Q的位置：X4＝a+L*cosm；Y4＝b-L*sinm；
旋转前点P的位置：X1＝a+2R*[sin(n-s)/2]*[cos(3n-s)/2]，Y1＝b-2R*[sin(n-s)/2]*[sin(3n-s)/2]；
旋转前点Q的位置：X2＝a+2R*[sin(n-s)/2]*[cos(3n-s)/2]+L*cos(n+m-s)，Y2＝b-2R*[sin(n-s)/2]*[sin(3n-s)/2]-L*sin(n+m-s)。
参照图23，③当门体的旋转角度为n，且n≥t，可求点O旋转前后距离为2R*[sin(n-t)/2]；
旋转前点P的位置：X1＝a，Y1＝b；
旋转前点Q的位置：X2＝a+L*cosm；Y2＝b-L*sinm；
旋转后点P的位置：X3＝a-2R*[sin(n-t)/2]*[cos(180°-(3n-t)/2)]，Y3＝b+2R*[sin(n-t)/2]*[sin(180-(3n-t)/2)]；
旋转后点Q的位置：X4＝a-2R*[sin(n-t)/2]*[cos(180°-(3n-t)/2)]+L*cos(m+n-t)，Y4＝b+2R*[sin(n-t)/2]*[sin(180-(3n-t)/2)]-L*sin(m+n-t)。
当旋转角度为s时，k＝K`，此时变动点满足①②，可得到s；
当旋转角度为t时，此时变动点满足②③，可得到t。
综上所述，在门体30由关闭状态打开至G max的过程中，门体30绕一动态变化的点旋转从而使门体30向所述内侧移动。
实施例二
本实施例二中的铰链组件与实施例一中的铰链组件的原理相同，其不同之处在于，本实施例二对第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60的形状进行了限定。
在本实施例中，第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60为规则曲线。
参见图3、图5至图10以及图12至图17，第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段以及第二轨迹线K均为光滑曲线，第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段与直线轨迹段光滑过渡连接。示例地，第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段与直线轨迹段相切。
对应的，第一轨迹槽50的曲线槽段的槽壁为光滑曲面，第二轨迹槽60的槽壁亦为光滑曲面，第一轨迹槽50的直线槽段的槽壁与曲线槽段的槽壁光滑过渡连接。例如，第一轨迹槽50的直线槽段的平面槽壁与其曲线槽段的曲面槽壁相切。
以上设置，使第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50流畅移动，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60流畅移动，从而有利于提高门体30打开的顺畅度，延长铰链轴使用寿命。在门体30打开过程中，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50的运动连续不间断，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60的运动连续不间断。
在本实施例中，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50的运动，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60的运动相当于滚子相对凸轮的运动。对于滚子从动件的凸轮机构，滚子半径的大小常常影响到凸轮实际轮廓曲线的形状，因此需要合理选择滚子的半径。
如图24中a)所示，当凸轮理论轮廓曲线为内凹曲线时，ρ′＝ρ+r T，故r T的大小不受ρ的限制，此时无论滚子半径大小，凸轮工作轮廓总是光滑曲线。
其中，ρ为理论廓线半径；ρ′为实际廓线半径；r T为滚子半径。
当凸轮理论轮廓曲线为外凸曲线时，则ρ＝ρ′-r T：
(1)如图24中b)所示，当ρ min＞r T，ρ′＞0，这时实际轮廓曲线为平滑曲线；其中，ρ min为理论轮廓曲线外凸部分的最小曲率半径(即最尖锐部分的曲率半径)。
(2)如图24中c)所示，当ρ min＝r T时，ρ′＝0，在凸轮实际轮廓曲线上产生尖点，这种尖点极易磨损，容易改变凸轮的运动规律，不能使用。
(3)如图24中d)所示，当ρ min＜r T时，ρ′＜0，则实际轮廓曲线发生交叉现象，交叉点以上部分的实际轮廓曲线加工时将被切去，从而导致这一部分运动规律不能实现。
因此，为了使凸轮轮廓在任意位置既不变尖也不相交，滚子半径r T需要小于理论轮廓曲线外凸部分的最小曲率半径ρ min，例如，r T≤0.8ρ min。若此要求无法满足则加大凸轮基圆半径，重新设计凸轮轮廓曲线。
基于此，在本实施例中，第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段对应于第一轨迹槽50的凸轮理论轮廓曲线，凸轮理论轮廓曲线为外凸曲线(曲线槽段向靠近门侧壁32的方向凸出)。第一轨迹槽50的靠近门前壁31的槽壁为实际轮廓曲线。第一铰链轴41的半径r T的大小满足(1)的设置(ρ min＞r T)，以确保第一轨迹槽50的靠近门前壁31的槽壁为平滑曲线。
在本实施例中，第二轨迹线K对应于第二轨迹槽60的凸轮理论轮廓曲线，凸轮理论轮廓曲线为外凸曲线(第二轨迹槽向远离门前壁的方向凸出)；第二轨迹槽60的靠近门前壁31的槽壁为实际轮廓曲线；第二铰链轴42的半径亦满足r T的大小满足(1)的设置(ρ min＞r T)，以确保第二轨迹槽60的靠近门前壁31的槽壁为平滑曲线，一方面使第一铰链轴41运动流畅，另一方面减少第二轨迹槽60的磨损。
也就是说，第二轨迹槽60本质上设置为凸轮，可以有效避免凹型结构所导致的运动不连续且容易磨损的缺陷。综上，本实施例中，第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段、第二轨迹线K均设置为外凸型的凸轮曲线。
示例地，第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段和至少部分的第二轨迹线K亦可设置为内凹曲线。例如，当设置第一轨迹线S由第一定位点P 1先沿直线向门侧壁32延伸，再沿曲线向靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的方向延伸至第六定位点P 6时，第二轨迹线K靠近门侧壁32的部分可设置为向靠近门侧壁32且远离门前壁31的方向延伸的曲线。在此情况下，第一轨迹线S的曲线轨迹段和第二轨迹线K的靠近门侧壁32的部分设置为内凹曲线，使第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42沿其平滑运动。
实施例三
本实施例三与实施例一和/或实施例二的的设置相同，其区别在于：相对于前述实施例一和实施例二的情况，如图25至图27所示，第二轨迹线K包括位于第一导向点Q 1远离 门侧壁32且远离门后壁33一侧的第七导向点Q 0，第一轨迹线S包括位于第一定位点P 1远离门侧壁32一侧的第七定位点P 0。
当门体30关闭时，第一铰链轴41的中心轴(定位中心轴P)位于第七定位点P 0，第二铰链轴42的中心轴(导向中心轴Q)位于第七导向点Q 0。当门体30打开至G 0时，第一铰链轴41的中心轴(定位中心轴P)位于第一定位点P 1，第二铰链轴42的中心轴(导向中心轴Q)位于第一导向点Q 1。
在门体30由关闭状态打开至G 0的过程中，第一铰链轴41由第七定位点P 0向靠近门侧壁32的方向沿直线移动至第一定位点P 1，第二铰链轴42由第七导向点Q 0移动至第一导向点Q 1。
示例地，在门体30由关闭状态打开至G 0的过程中，若以门体30(或第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60)为静止参照物，第二铰链轴42以门体30关闭时第一铰链轴41的中心轴为旋转轴作近似旋转运动。
需要说明的是，所述近似旋转运动包括标准定义的绕轴旋转运动，亦包括以该以上过程中第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50发生微小位移时，第二铰链轴42的旋转运动。
示例地，所述近似旋转运动包括第二铰链轴42以运动的第一铰链轴41的中心轴为旋转轴进行的旋转运动，且门体30每旋转单位角度时，第一铰链轴41的中心轴的位移距离小于0.5mm。
示例地，近似旋转运动包括在门体30由关闭状态打开至G 0的过程中，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50的位移小于0.2mm。即“近似旋转运动”包括第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50产生微小移动的情况。
示例地，G 0为7°～10°中的任一值。
示例地，第一轨迹弧K上的线段P 0P 1的长度为0～0.2mm。
在门体30打开的最初阶段(即，门体30从关闭状态打开至G 0)，门体30以旋转运动为主，从而可以快速克服门体30与箱体10之间的互吸力，以使门体30与箱体10分离。
需要说明的是，门体30由G 0打开至G max的过程与实施例一中的第一阶段至第三阶段相同，在此不再赘述。
实施例四
本实施例四相对实施例三，其主要区别在于，门体30上设置有翻转梁9。
如图28和图29所示，冰箱1包括相对设置的两个门体30，两个相对设置的门体30共同配合以打开或关闭取放口。
翻转梁9设置在一个门体30的内衬面上，且靠近另一个门体30。冰箱的储藏室的顶壁上设有导向槽14，翻转梁9可与导向槽14滑动配合以实现翻转梁9与其对应的门体30之间的不同角度的切换。在两个门体30关闭时，翻转梁9封闭两个门体30及箱体10之间的空隙，以有效防止冷气外溢。
示例地，冰箱1还包括导向块13，导向块13设置在翻转梁9的顶部且与导向槽14的位置相对应。
在实施例四中轨迹的限定下，由门体30的导向块13开始进入箱体10上的导向槽14至翻转梁9完成翻转的过程中，以门体30(或第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60)为静止参照物，第二铰链轴42以第一铰链轴41的中心轴为旋转轴作近似旋转运动。
即门体30由G 0旋转关闭至关闭状态的过程与翻转梁9上导向块13与导向槽14接触至翻转梁9完成翻转的过程相对应。
在实施例三的轨迹特征限定下，当门体30从大于G 0的任一角度关闭至G 0时，翻转梁9顶端的导向块13与箱体10上的导向槽14相接触，导向块13开始进入导向槽14内；当门体30关闭时，翻转梁9完成翻转。
本实施例四的设置使得促使门体30上翻转梁9翻转的作用力不会随着门体30向所述外侧移动而被抵消，从而避免导向块13进入导向槽14后因未完成翻转而被卡住，有效确保旋转梁的门体30关闭到位，从而确保冰箱低温储物的有效性。
实施例五
本实施例五与实施例一至实施例四的原理相同，其主要区别在于对门体30由关闭状态向箱体10继续关闭的情况进行了限定。
在本实施例中，如图30至图32所示，门体30关闭时，穿过第一侧棱W并与第二参考平面M 2相平行的平面记为第三参考平面M 3。第三参考平面M 3与基准平面M 0相交于门体30关闭时的理论上的第一侧棱W。第三参考平面M 3在门体30相对箱体10的打开或关闭过程中，并不会随之移动，是相对于箱体10保持静止的参考平面。
本实施例中，参照图30，门体30处于关闭状态时，门前壁31与第二参考平面M 2相平行，即门前壁31与第三参考平面M 3共面；即第三参考平面M 3经过门体30处于关闭状态时的门前壁31所在平面，且第三参考平面M 3经过第一侧棱W。
当门前壁31的远离门侧壁32的一端位于第三参考平面M 3远离箱体10一侧时，门前壁31与第三参考平面M 3的夹角为正数；当门前壁31远离门侧壁32的一端位于第三参考平面M 3靠近箱体10一侧时，门前壁31与第三参考平面M 3的夹角为负数。
如图31所示，当门体30处于关闭状态，并继续挤压门封条5时，由于门封条5为具有磁性的弹性体，门前壁31远离门侧壁32的一端可以移动至第三参考平面M 3靠近箱体10一侧，门前壁31与第三参考平面M 3之间的存在夹角δ 1；δ 1＜0°。例如，第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50远离门侧壁32一端的端壁相接触，且第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60远离门侧壁32一端的端壁相接触时，门前壁31与第三参考平面M 3的夹角为δ 1，夹角δ 1为0°至-3°中的任一值。
在本实施例中，门体30由关闭状态继续沿关闭方向运动时至时δ 1，第二铰链轴42以第一铰链轴41的中心轴为旋转轴做近似旋转运动。即，门体30由关闭状态继续关闭至δ 1时，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50的最大位移小于0.2mm。以上设置使得当门体30被用力摔向箱体10时，可以防止第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60远离门侧壁32的端部接触而将门体30弹开。
示例地，当门体30处于关闭状态时，第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50远离门侧壁32一端的端壁之间具有第三间隙μ 1，第三间隙μ 1的宽度为0至0.2mm其中任一值。例如，如图30所示，第三间隙μ 1的宽度为0。
第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60的远离门侧壁32一端的端壁之间具有第四间隙μ 2，且第四间隙μ 2的宽度＞0。以上第二间隙μ 2使得当门体30被用力摔向箱体10时，可以防止第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60的远离门侧壁32的端部接触而将门体30弹开。
如图30至图32所示，当门体30处于关闭状态时，第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50远离门侧壁32一端的端壁相接触，门体30由关闭状态沿关闭方向继续运动时，第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50保持接触。
第二轨迹线K具有预留导向点Q`，第二铰链轴42移动至第二轨迹槽60远离门侧壁32的端部时，导向中心轴Q位于预留导向点Q`处。预留导向点Q`与第一导向点Q 1之间的轨迹段记为预留轨迹段Q`Q 1。示例地，预留轨迹段Q`Q 1由第一导向点Q 0向靠近门前壁31和门侧壁32的一侧延伸至预留导向点Q`。
当门体30关闭时，第一铰链轴41移动至第一定位点P 1且第二铰链轴移动至第一导向点Q 1，当门体30由关闭状态继续沿关闭方向运动时，第一铰链轴41保持在第一定位点P 1(相对P 1向远离门侧壁32的一侧移动的距离在0～0.2mm之间)，第二铰链轴42由第一导向点Q 1移动至预留导向点Q`，门体30向靠近箱体10的方向继续运动的旋转角度为记G`。在本实施例中，G`≥δ 1，从而使得门体30被用力摔向箱体10时，可以防止第二铰链轴42受第二轨迹槽60的远离门侧壁32的端部的冲击。
以上，在门体30由关闭状态向靠近箱体10的方向继续运动的过程中，以门体30(或第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60)为静止参照物，第二铰链轴42以第一铰链轴41的中心轴为旋转轴作近似旋转运动。
例如，G`＝δ 1，以使门前壁31与第三参考平面M 3之间的夹角达到δ 1时，第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50的远离门侧壁32一端的端壁相接触，且第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60远离门侧壁32一端的端壁相接触。
实施例六
本实施例六与实施例一至实施例五的原理大致相同，其不同之处在于，本实施例六对第一轨迹槽50、第二轨迹槽60在门体30上的设置进行了限定。
参照图33至图36，门体30包括安装块80，安装块80一体成型，且安装在门体30上 与铰链板40相对的位置，第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60形成于安装块80上。
参照图33和图34，本实施例以设置于门体30上端的安装块80为例进行说明。在本实施例中，安装块80包括形成有第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60的轨迹块。第一轨迹槽50包括槽底和环绕槽底边沿的周向槽壁。周向槽壁围设出与槽底相对设置的槽口。第二轨迹槽60的结构与第一轨迹槽50的结构相同，其在于槽的形状。
安装块80包括板体81，第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60设置于板体81上。位于门体30的上端的门端盖38上设有容纳槽37，安装块80设置在容纳槽37内，通过紧固件如螺钉等可以将板体81与门体30紧固连接。例如，多个用于连接板体81与容纳槽37的螺钉孔设置在板体81上，且位于第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60的边沿处。
设置于门体30上端的安装块80上的轨迹槽(如第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60)的槽口位于其槽底的上端。
示例地，如图33和图34所示，安装块80还包括除尘孔11。除尘孔11设置在第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60的槽底上。例如，安装块80包括多个除尘孔11，多个除尘孔11分别设置于第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60的槽底上的靠近或远离门侧壁32的端部。
可以理解的是，铰链组件在长时间使用后，第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60内容易积累灰尘或杂物，影响门开关。在本实施例中，当第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60内有杂物或灰尘时，可以通过开关门体30，使铰链轴运动至轨迹槽的任一端，以带动灰尘或杂物至除尘孔11的位置并排出，从而有利于提高铰链组件的使用寿命，有利于提高门体30打开的流畅性。
在一些实施例中，容纳槽37的底壁上形成有第一收容腔371和第二收容腔372。第一轨迹槽50安装于第一收容腔371内，第二轨迹槽60安装于第二收容腔372内。板体81设置在容纳槽37中，并由容纳槽37的周向槽壁限定位置。以上设置，将安装块80安装于容纳槽37内，有利于提高安装块80的定位速度和精度。
第一收容腔371和第二收容腔372的腔底上均设置有集尘腔12，集尘腔12的位置与除尘孔11的位置相对应。落入第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60的灰尘，在第一铰链轴41或第二铰链轴42的作用下通过除尘孔11排出至集尘腔12内，从而有利于提高铰链组件的使用寿命，有利于提高门体30打开的流畅性。
示例地，第一轨迹槽50与第一收容腔371的腔壁之间具有第一变形间隙；第二轨迹槽60与第二收容腔372的腔壁之间具有第二变形间隙。第一变形间隙和第二变形间隙的设置，使第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60具有变形空间。
可以理解的是，在门体30打开时，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50、第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60运动，第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60保留有一定的弹性变形空间，可以增加第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60的使用寿命，同时，可以避免第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60因刚度过大和加工误差导致门体30卡顿。
在一些实施例中，铰链组件远离第一体侧壁的一端设有第一配合部，安装块80具有锁定块，锁定块上形成有第二配合部，第二配合部用于与第一配合部相配合以实现门体30与箱体10的锁定与解锁。
在本实施例中，锁定块与轨迹块一体成型，以形成安装块80。
如图35至图44所示，本实施例将以设置于门体30下端的安装块80为例进行说明。
示例地，参见图35和图36，锁定块上的第二配合部设置为锁定结构，例如，第二配合部包括设于板体81远离门侧壁32的一侧的锁钩82。锁钩82向远离门侧壁32的方向延伸并向靠近门后壁33且靠近门侧壁32的方向弯折。锁钩82的开口朝向板体81(即，朝向门侧壁32)，且锁钩82的自由端相较于其固定端更靠近门后壁33。
示例地，参见图37和图38，第一配合部设为止挡部403，止挡部403设于铰链板40的远离第一体侧壁的一侧。止挡部403靠近箱体的一侧形成有勾挂间隙404。当门体30处于关闭状态时，锁钩82的自由端收容于勾挂间隙404内，止挡部403位于锁钩82内，门体30上的锁钩82勾住铰链板40上的止挡部403，从而锁紧门体30，避免门体30关闭不严，影响冰箱的冷藏冷冻效果。
参见图38至图42，当门体30打开时，锁钩82受力发生形变而克服止挡部403的阻挡，从而脱离止挡部403。
示例地，参见图35和图36，锁钩82包括连接部83和勾挂部84。连接部83与板体81连接，勾挂部84与连接部83连接并向靠近门后壁33且门侧壁32的一侧弯折。螺钉穿设连接部83并插设在门体30中，以将连接部83与门体30固定连接，从而可以加强连接部83与门体30的连接强度，使得锁钩82在脱离止挡部403时，仅勾挂部84发生形变。
勾挂部84和止挡部403的自由端均呈圆弧状，这样有利于勾挂部84顺畅地勾住止挡部403或者脱离止挡部403。
在门体30关闭的过程中，勾挂部84的自由端逐渐靠近止挡部403，待勾挂部84与止挡部403相抵接时，在止挡部403的反作用力的作用下，勾挂部84发生形变，使止挡部403进入勾挂部84内，勾挂部84的自由端进入勾挂间隙404内，从而使锁钩82与铰链板40锁定，实现门体30与箱体10的锁定。
可以理解的是，在门体30的打开过程中，勾挂部84和止挡部403之间的作用与门体30的关闭过程相反，在此不再赘述。
示例地，当门体30由大于设定角度(例如，7°)的任一角度关闭至所述设定角度时，门体30在勾挂部84与止挡部403的作用下自动闭关。
示例地，在门体30打开至设定的解锁角度(例如，为5°至8°)时，勾挂部84与止挡部403相分离。
在一些实施例中，解锁角度设置为G 1，即，门体30打开至G 1时，第一铰链轴41沿第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段移动时，勾挂部84与止挡部403相分离。或者，解锁角度设置为G 2，即，门体30打开至G 2时，第一铰链轴41的中心轴沿第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段移动至其靠近门侧壁32的终点时，勾挂部84与止挡部403相分离。
可以理解的，在门体30打开的第一阶段，门体30主要做旋转运动，便于锁钩82与止挡部403分离。
在一些实施例中，如图35和图36所示，门体30上设有第一凸起34和第二凸起35，第一凸起34和第二凸起35之间形成有间隙槽36。第一凸起34大致位于第二凸起35的靠近门前壁31和门侧壁32的一侧。连接部83包括插接板86，插接板86插接在间隙槽36内，这样，通过第一凸起34和第二凸起35的限位可以避免连接部83在沿由门前壁31至门后壁33的方向发生形变。
例如，参见图35和图36，插接板86设置为弧形板，第二凸起35设置为弧形板。第一凸起34靠近第二凸起35的边沿且与第二凸起35的形状一致，以与第二凸起35共同限定出弧形的间隙槽36。弧形板状的插接板与弧形的间隙槽36相配合，从而可以增大间隙槽36对连接部83的限定面积，有利于提高安装块80与门体30连接的强度。
需要说明的是，本实施例中的安装块80的轨迹块与锁定块一体成型。在一些实施例中，轨迹块与锁定块分体设置。示例地，第一轨迹槽50及第二轨迹槽60一体成型于门端盖38上，锁定块单独形成安装块80，以安装于容纳槽37内。
示例地，位于门体30上端的安装块80包括轨迹块，而不包括锁定块。相对应的，当安装块80的结构改变时，设置于门体上容纳槽37与之相适应，以收容并固定安装块80。
示例地，安装块80包括分体设置的轨迹块和锁定块。
在一些实施例中，如图28所示，冰箱1设置为十字对开门的形式，即，冰箱1包括四个门体30，其中两个门体30相对设置，另两个门体30相对设置。冰箱包含有六个铰链组件以将四个门体30固定于箱体10上。
所述六个铰链组件包括两个上铰链组件、两个中铰链组件和两个下铰链组件。当门体30打开时，门体30上的轨迹块与铰链组件中的铰链轴作用，使得门体30在旋转的同时向所述内侧移动，使得门体30的第一侧棱W超出基准平面M 0的距离较小。中铰链组件包括铰链板和通轴，通轴从铰链板向上且向下延伸。通轴包括上铰链轴和下铰链轴，上铰链轴位于铰链板上侧并与位于中铰链组件上方的门体30的下端部相配合，下铰链轴位于铰链板下侧并与位于中铰链组件下方的门体30的上端部相配合。
示例地，每个门体30的上端的安装块80包括轨迹块，每个门体30下端的安装块包括轨迹块和锁定块。
以上设置为十字门形式的冰箱，冷藏室位于冷冻室的上方。用于打开或关闭冷藏室的门体30上端的轨迹块与用于打开或关闭冷冻室的门体30上端的轨迹块相同。用于打开或 关闭冷藏室的门体30下端的轨迹块和锁定块与用于打开或关闭冷冻室的门体30下端的轨迹块和锁定块相同。以上设置增加了轨迹块和锁定块的通用性，从而有利于生产制造，便于冰箱1的装配。
需要说明的是，本公开的一些实施例不局限于包括四个门体30，亦适用于包括至少四个门体30的冰箱1。
在本实施例中，安装块80可以由聚甲醛(Polyformaldehyde,POM)制成，聚甲醛具有耐摩擦性强的特性，可以提高铰链组件的使用寿命。
在本实施例中，第一轨迹槽50、第二轨迹槽60和锁定结构一体成型，以形成安装块80，从而增加了安装块80的结构精度和强度。例如，安装块80通过注塑的方式一体成型。
在一些实施例中，门体30和铰链板40之间设有用于限制门体30打开到最大角度的限位结构，从而避免大力开门时损坏安装块80。
参照图43和图44，门体30的下端设有限位部85，限位部85位于设于门体30下端的安装块80的前端。铰链板40包括限位面405。限位面405设置在铰链板40远离箱体10一端且靠近第一体侧壁。当门体30旋转到最大角度G max时，限位部85与铰链板40的限位面405相抵，从而止挡门体30继续旋转。
即，参照图45和图46，定位中心轴P移动至第六定位点P 6，导向中心轴Q移动至第六导向点Q 6时，门体30下端的限位部85与铰链板40的限位面405相抵接，从而可以避免第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60靠近门侧壁32的端部相作用而产生磨损。
在本实施例中，如图35和图36所示，限位部85包括嵌装部851和限位条852。限位部85可以是钣金件。
嵌装部851呈板状，安装在门体30下端的容纳槽37内，安装块80(轨迹块)的板体81从下端将嵌装部851夹持在门体30中，从而实现限位部85与门体30的固定。
限位条852呈凸条状，由嵌装部851靠近门前壁31的边沿向下延伸出门体30的下表面形成，从而在门体30带动限位部85旋转到最大角度时，限位条852会被铰链板40的限位面405阻挡，从而止挡门体30，使门体30停止旋转。
可以理解的是，限位部85通过安装块80的夹持固定在门体30中，省略了限位部85与门体30之间的连接结构，简化了产品结构。
需要说明的是，限位部85也可以是设置在门体30的上端，此处不再赘述。
另外，结合实施例三，本实施例六中门体30上设置锁钩82，在门体30关闭时，锁钩82与铰链板40上的止挡部403锁定。实施例三中设置门体30在第一阶段中以旋转运动为主，从而能够快速分离锁钩82与铰链组件上的止挡部403，以快速分离门体30和箱体10。
实施例七
本实施例七与实施例一至实施例六的原理相同，本实施例七主要对门体30打开至最大角度G max时第一铰链轴41及第二铰链轴42的位置的一种设置形式进行了限定。
在本实施例中，如图45和图46所示，当门体30打开至最大角度G max时，第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50的靠近门侧壁32的端部相接触，第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60靠近门侧壁32的端部(即，末端)相接触。如上设置，使得门体30因被大力打开至最大角度G max时，第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42分别同时运动至第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60的端部，即，同时与门体30相互作用，从而可以降低铰链板40受到的应力，有利于提高铰链组件与箱体10的安装稳固性。
实施例八
本实施例八与实施例一至实施例六的原理相同；相对于实施例七，本实施例八主要对门体30打开至最大角度G max时，第一铰链轴41及第二铰链轴42的位置的另一种设置方式的限定。
如图43和图44所示，门体30的下端设有限位部85，且限位部85靠近门前壁31，铰链板40远离箱体10一端且靠近第一体侧壁的位置形成有限位面405。当门体30旋转至最大角度G max时，限位部85与铰链板40的限位面405相抵，从而止挡门体30继续旋转。
当门体30打开至最大角度G max时，第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50的靠近门侧壁32的端部相接触，第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60靠近门侧壁32的端部之间具有分离间隙μ 0(即，间隙，见图44)，且分离间隙μ 0的宽度＞0。这样，在门体30因被大力打开至最 大角度G max时，限位部85与铰链板40相接触，第一铰链轴41与第一轨迹槽50的端部相接触(有相互作用力)，第二铰链轴42与第二轨迹槽60的端部不接触(无相互作用力)。相对第二铰链轴42，第一铰链轴41更靠近限位部85。以上设置，可以降低铰链板40受到的弯矩和应力，有利于提高铰链组件与箱体10的安装稳固性。
实施例九
本实施例九与前述实施例六的不同之处在于安装块80的结构设置。在本实施例中，安装块80分体设置为轨迹块和锁定块。如图47所示，轨迹块安装于门端盖38靠近门体30内腔的一侧。同前述实施例，轨迹块安装在门体30上与铰链板40相对的位置，第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60形成于轨迹块上。
参照图47至图50，本实施例中以设置于门体30上端的轨迹块为例进行说明。轨迹块包括第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60。第一轨迹槽50包括槽底、环绕槽底边沿的周向槽壁。周向槽壁围设出与槽底相对设置的槽口。第二轨迹槽60的结构与第一轨迹槽50的结构相同，其不同之处在于槽的形状。
轨迹块包括板体81，第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60形成于板体81上。位于门体30的上端的门端盖38远离铰链组件的一侧形成有有容纳槽37。板体81设置在容纳槽37内，且板体81与容纳槽37的周向槽壁相配合。在本实施例中，容纳槽37上设有用于固定板体81的卡接件，以将轨迹块与门体30紧固连接。例如，还可以通过紧固件如螺钉等将固定板81与门端盖38固定连接。
门端盖38靠近铰链组件的位置处设置有第一通孔71和第二通孔72。第一通孔71的形状与第一轨迹槽50的槽口形状大致相同，第二通孔72的形状与我经二轨迹槽60的槽口形状大致相同。轨迹块安装于门端盖38远离铰链组件的一侧。即轨迹块安装于门体30的内部。
例如，参见图47和图48，轨迹块的板体81与门端盖38靠近铰链组件的端壁相配合，并通过卡接件与门体30固定连接。需要说明的是，轨迹块与铰链组件分别位于门端盖38的所述端壁的两侧。第一轨迹槽50的槽口与第一通孔71相对应，第二轨迹槽60的槽口与第二通孔72相对应。门端盖38的所述端壁的远离铰链组件的一侧设置有多个固定柱，板体81上形成有多个与固定柱相配合的固定孔。通过将固定柱安装于板体81的固定孔内，可以将轨迹块快速定位在门端盖38上。
在一些实施例中，如图50所示，第一轨迹槽50包括位于板体81远离第一轨迹槽50的槽底的一侧的第一环板73，第一环板73限定出第一轨迹槽50的槽口。第二轨迹槽60包括位于板体81的远离第二轨迹槽60的槽底的一侧的第二环板74，第二环板74限定出第二轨迹槽60的槽口。
第一环板73安装于第一通孔71内，第二环板74安装于第二通孔72内，板体81与门体30靠近铰链组件的端板相配合，结合板体81上固定孔与门端盖38上的固定柱的配合，能够精准定位装配。以上本实施例中的轨迹块与门端盖38的装配方式，使轨迹块隐藏设置于门体30内部，从而可以提高门体30的美观度，并减少门体30与轨迹块的配合缝隙，便于门体30的清洁。
在一些实施例中，冰箱至少包含成对设置的两个门体30。轨迹块设置于门体30的上端和/或下端。冰箱1的靠近第一体侧壁的门体30上端的轨迹块与冰箱1的靠近第二体侧壁的门体30下端的轨迹块相同，冰箱1的靠近第一体侧壁的门体30下端的轨迹块与冰箱1的靠近第二体侧壁的门体30上端的轨迹块相同。
可以理解的是，上述设置的两个门体30，需要通过四个轨迹块与箱体10相连接。位于一个门体30的上端的轨迹块与位于另一个门体30的下端的轨迹块相同。如此，本实施例中的冰箱1，只需要设置两种结构的仅具有轨迹槽的轨迹块即可满足安装需求，从而可以提高轨迹块等零部件的通用性，有利于降低冰箱1的制造成本。
示例地，如图51和图52所示，门体30的下端设有形成有锁钩82的锁定块，锁定块位于轨迹块的远离门侧壁32的一侧，并安装于位于第一通孔71和第二通孔72远离门侧壁32一侧的容纳槽37内。
锁钩82包括连接部83和勾挂部84。连接部83与容纳槽37连接，勾挂部84与连接部83连接并向靠近门后壁33和门侧壁32的一侧弯折。螺钉穿设连接部83与门体30连接，以加强连接部83处与门体30的连接强度，使得锁钩82在脱离止挡部403时仅勾挂 部84发生形变。
需要说明的是，本实施例的锁定块安装于门端盖38靠近铰链的一侧，即锁定块由门体30外侧固定安装。本实施例中的锁定块与前述实施例六中的锁钩82的设置相同，在此不再赘述。结合实施例六，勾挂部84与止挡部403相配合，以实现门体30与箱体10的解锁或锁定。
即本实施例中，轨迹块仅设置有轨迹槽，且轨迹块安装于门端盖38远离铰链组件的一侧，然后，锁钩82单独形成锁定块，安装于门端盖38靠近铰链的一侧。
实施例十
本实施例十与实施例一至实施例九的的设置相同，其区别在于：
在本实施例中，如图29所示，冰箱1包括相对设置的两个门体30，两个门体30相配合以打开或关闭取放口。两个门体30关闭时，一个门体30靠近另一个门体30一侧的内衬面上设有翻转梁9。冰箱1的储藏室的顶壁上设有导向槽14，翻转梁9可与导向槽14滑动配合以实现翻转梁9相对于门体30不同角度的切换。
例如，参照图29，当门体30处于打开状态时，翻转梁9大致垂直于门体30。当门体30关闭时，翻转梁9与门体30大致平行，并封闭两个门体30及箱体10之间的空隙，以有效防止冷气外溢。
例如，翻转梁9包括门转梁后盖，门转梁后盖通过第一门铰链和第二门铰链与门体30转动连接，且门转梁后盖与两个门铰链(即第一门铰链和第二门铰链)之间分别采用扭簧弹性连接。第一门铰链位于第二门铰链的上方。在门转梁后盖的顶部固设有导向块13，导向块13作为翻转梁9的转动部件与导向槽14相配合以实现翻转梁9相对门体30不同角度的切换。
第一门铰链、第二门铰链和门转梁后盖上均设有用于穿设扭簧的通孔，利用扭簧将两个门铰链分别与门转梁后盖连接。例如，第一门铰链与门转梁后盖通过第一扭簧连接，第二门铰链与门转梁后盖通过第二扭簧连接。翻转梁9绕两个门铰链作旋转运动时，第一扭簧和第二扭簧储存弹性能或释放弹性能，以使门转梁后盖稳定转动或及时复位。
在门体30打开时，翻转梁9由于扭簧扭力(第一扭簧和第二扭簧)的作用，紧紧贴附于两个门铰链固定于门体30内衬的一侧。
通常情况下，在门体30关闭的过程中，两个铰链轴在对应轨迹槽内运动，门体30相对铰链组件在向所述外侧运动一定距离，使得促使翻转梁9翻转的作用力会随着门体30向所述外侧的移动而被抵消(或一部分)，从而可能导致翻转梁9顶部的导向块13在进入导向槽14后不能完成翻转而被卡住，使门体30不能完全关闭。
如图53和图54所示，当关闭门体30时，需要对门体30施加关门力F W，在关门力F W的作用下，门体30逐渐闭合。当门体30关闭至角度G S时，翻转梁9顶端的导向块13与导向槽14相接触。在门体30继续关闭(从角度G S)的过程中，导向块13受到导向槽14槽壁的压力作用开始翻转，扭簧在径向上压缩。当翻转梁9翻转过角度G` F，达到扭簧临界值。扭簧在达到临界值后开始伸展，与导向槽14槽壁的压力共同作用，使翻转梁9快速翻转到位，直至门体30完全关闭。当门体30完全关闭时，扭簧扭力被释放，重新达到松弛状态，翻转梁9与门体30上设置的封条接触，可以有效防止冷气由两个门体30之间外溢。
以上，对应于翻转梁9翻转至G` F，门体30的关闭角度为G F，且G S＞G F。示例地，G` F＝45°，即当翻转梁9翻转至45°时，达到扭簧临界值。G S设置为6°至12°中的任一值，G F设置为3°至5°中的任一值。当门体30关闭达到G F后，翻转梁9翻转。以上在翻转梁9翻转达到G` F后的阶段，扭簧伸展释放扭力，该阶段中扭簧所释放的扭力记为翻转力F N，翻转梁9在翻转力F N作用下翻转到位。
需要说明的是，以上翻转梁9翻转过程中，关门力F W可以仅持续至门体30关闭至角度G F后，即在门体30旋转关闭至扭簧临界点后，即使撤去关门力F W，翻转梁9也可自动完成翻转。
综上可知，在门体30由G S关闭至G F的过程中，扭簧压缩，在关门力F W及导向槽14槽壁的压力的共同作用下，勾挂部84发生弹性变形，而在门体30关闭至G F后的关闭阶段，翻转梁9在扭簧所产生的翻转力F N和导向槽14槽壁的压力共同作用下完成翻转。
结合实施例六或实施例九中的锁定结构的设置，如图38和图52所示，在关闭门体30时，用户对门体30施加关门力F W，在关门力F W的作用下，门体30逐渐闭合。随着门体30旋转关闭，勾挂部84的自由端逐渐靠近止挡部403，且当门体30关闭至G B0(见图40)时，勾挂部84与止挡部403相抵接。随着门体30(在关门力F W的作用下)继续关闭，止挡部403与勾挂部84相互作用，勾挂部84发生弹性变形，动勾挂部84逐渐进入勾挂间隙404(即，止挡部403进入勾挂部84内)。
当门体30继续关闭至G B1时，勾挂部84的弹性变形量达到门体30关闭过程中的最大变形量。在门体30继续关闭至G B1后，勾挂部84的弹性变形所储存的弹性能释放，与止挡部403作用力共同作用，勾挂部84向松弛状态恢复，并带动勾挂部84进一步地进入勾挂间隙404内，使门体30自动关闭，且锁钩82与止挡部403锁定，从而实现门体30与箱体10的锁定。
以上，G B0＞G B1。示例地，G B0设置为15°至20°中的任一值，G B1设置为3°至8°中的任一值。如上所述，在门体30关闭达到G B1后的阶段中，勾挂部84释放弹性能，该阶段中勾挂部84所释放的作用力记为锁定力FS，锁定力F S促使门体30关闭。
需要说明的是，在以上门体30关闭过程中，可以关门力F W仅持续至门体30关闭至G B1后，即在门体30旋转关闭至勾挂部84弹性变形量最大后，即使撤去关门力F W，门体30也可自动完成翻转。
另外，当在门体30在关闭至G B1后撤去关门力F W时，门体30仍具有惯性力F G，以使门体30保持运动趋势。
综上可知，在门体30由G B0关闭至G B1的过程中，勾挂部84在关门力F W及止挡部403的共同作用下，发生弹性变形。当门体30关闭至G B1时，勾挂部84发生弹性变形量达到门体30关闭过程中的最大变形量。在门体30由G B1继续关闭的过程中，勾挂部84的弹性力释放，在锁定力F S、勾挂部84弹性力、止挡部403的作用力以及惯性力F G的共同作用下，门体30快速关闭。
示例地，以上对门体30上单独设置旋转梁或单独设置勾挂部84的关门过程进行了说明；以下对门体30上同时设置旋转梁和勾挂部84的关门设置进行说明。
如图55所示，设置G B1＞G S，即当门体30关闭至G B1时，也即勾挂部84弹性变形量达到最大时，翻转梁9最顶端的导向块13与导向槽14未接触。
在本实施例中，关门力F W由开始关闭持续至G B1，即门体30关闭至G B1后，用户可以撤去关门力F W，门体30会自动关闭。
当门体30由G B1继续关闭至G S时，导向块13与导向槽14接触，且在门体30由G S继续关闭至G F的过程中，门体30在锁定力F S、勾挂部84的弹性力、止挡部403的作用力以及惯性力F G的共同作用下关闭，翻转梁9在锁定力F S、惯性力F G、导向槽14槽壁的压力的共同作用下开始翻转，扭簧在径向上压缩。
在门体30由G F继续关闭的过程中，门体30在锁定力F S、勾挂部84弹性力、止挡部403的作用力以及惯性力F G的共同作用下继续关闭，翻转梁9在锁定力F S、翻转力F N、惯性力F G以及导向槽14的槽壁的压力共同作用下，快速翻转到位。
以上本实施例中设置，G B1＞G S，门体30关闭至G B1时，勾挂部84弹性变形量达到最大值时，翻转梁9最顶端的导向块13与导向槽14尚未接触，能够利用锁钩结构所产生的锁定力F S以及门体30的惯性力F G促进翻转梁9的翻转，减少门体30关闭过程中、由于门体30旋转并向外运动而抵消促使翻转梁9翻转的作用力而导致的翻转梁9不能有效翻转到位的情况发生。
以上，门体30关闭过程中，止挡部与锁定结构在门体30关闭达到G B1后，随着门体30关闭角度的减小，锁定力F S不断衰减。
示例地，设置G B1＝G S，即，门体30关闭至G B1(G S)时，勾挂部84弹性变形量达到最大值，且导向块13开始与导向槽14接触，这样，可以充分利用锁定结构产生的锁定力F S以及门体30的惯性力F G以促进翻转梁9翻转，减少门体30关闭过程中、由于门体30旋转并向外运动而抵消促使翻转梁9翻转的作用力而导致的翻转梁9不能有效翻转到位的情况发生。
示例地，设置G B1∈[G S，G S+3°]，这样，可以避免因锁定力F S衰减过多，而导致门体 30关闭达到G B1后翻转梁9不能有效翻转到位。
结合实施例四，本实施例中的G S＝G 0。在实施例四的轨迹槽的轨迹特征设置下，勾挂部84弹性变形量达到最大值时，导向块13与导向槽14未接触，在导向块13与导向槽14接触后至翻转到位的过程中，第二铰链轴42以第一铰链轴41的中心轴为旋转轴作近似旋转运动。
本实施例中，在实施例一的轨迹槽的轨迹设置下，当门体30关闭至G B1时，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50位于第一接触定位点，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60位于第一接触导向点。
当门体30关闭至G S时，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50位于第二接触定位点，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60位于第二接触导向点。可以理解的是，当设置G B1＝G S时，第二接触定位点与第一接触定位点重合。
当门体30关闭至G F时，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50位于第三接触定位点，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60位于第三接触导向点。
第一接触定位点、第二接触定位点和第三接触定位点均位于第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段上，且第一接触定位点、第二接触定位点、第三接触定位点和第一定位点P 1依次向远离门侧壁32的方向排列。第一接触导向点、第二接触导向点、第三接触导向点均位于第二轨迹线K上，且第一接触导向点、第二接触导向点、第三接触导向点和第一导向点Q 1依次向靠近门前壁31且远离门侧壁32的方向排列。
示例地，如图56所示，设置G F＞G B1，即门体30关闭至G F时，翻转梁9翻转至扭簧临界值，勾挂部84弹性变形量还未达到最大变形量。
在本实施例中，关门力F W由门体30开始关闭持续至G B1，即门体30关闭至G B1时，撤去关门力F W，门体30可以自动关闭到位。
在门体30由G F继续关闭至G B1的过程中，门体30在关门力F W、勾挂部84弹性力以及止挡部403的作用力的共同作用下旋转，翻转梁9在关门力F W、翻转力F N以及导向槽14的槽壁的压力的共同作用下翻转。当门体30关闭至G B1时，勾挂部84的弹性变形量达到最大变形量。
在门体30由G B1继续关闭的过程中，门体30在锁定力F S、勾挂部84的弹性力与止挡部403的作用力的共同作用下关闭。翻转梁9在锁定力F S、翻转力F N以及导向槽14槽壁的压力共同作用下翻转。
可以理解的是，在门体30关闭的过程中，止挡部与锁定结构在门体30关闭达到G F后，门体30在关闭过程中向所述外侧移动会导致翻转力F N不断衰减。且在门体30关闭过程中，止挡部与锁定结构在门体30关闭达到G B1后，随着门体30关闭角度的减小，锁定力F S会不断衰减。
因此，例如，可以设置G B1∈(G F，G F-1°]，从而避免翻转力F N、锁定力F S衰减过多，以使门体30快速关闭到位，翻转梁9快速翻转到位。
在本实施例中，结合实施例一中轨迹槽的轨迹设置，门体30关闭过程中第一铰链轴41和第二铰链轴42分别相对于第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60的位置如下：
当门体30关闭至G B1时，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50位于第一接触定位点，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60位于第一接触导向点。
当门体30关闭至G F时，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50位于第三接触定位点，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60位于第三接触导向点。
第一接触定位点和第三接触定位点均位于第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段上，且第三接触定位点、第一接触定位点和第一定位点P 1依次向远离门侧壁32的方向排列。第一接触导向点、第三接触导向点均位于第二轨迹线K上，且第三接触导向点、第一接触导向点、第一导向点Q 1依次向远离门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向排列。
在本实施例中，可设置G S＝G B0，即当导向块13与导向槽14相接触时，勾挂部84与止挡部403相抵接。以在关门力F W的作用下，使翻转梁9的扭簧与勾挂部同步开始变形积蓄弹性能，而后再相继释放弹性能。这样，可以有效提高扭簧和钩挂部运动的同步性，减少门体30打开过程中，用户施加关闭力F W的时间，提高用户的使用体验。
示例地，如图57所示，G B1＝G F，即当门体30关闭至G B1时，勾挂部84弹性变形量 达到最大变形量，翻转梁9翻转至扭簧临界值。
在本实施例中，关门力F W由门体30开始关闭持续至G B1(G F)，即门体30关闭至G B1后，撤去关门力F W，门体30自动关闭到位。
在门体30由G B0关闭至G B1的过程中，门体30在关门力F W、勾挂部84弹性力以及止挡部403的作用力的共同作用下继续关闭，翻转梁9在关门力F W、导向槽14槽壁的压力共同作用下翻转，扭簧被压缩存储弹性势能。
当门体30关闭至G B1(G F)时，勾挂部84弹性变形量达到最大，翻转梁9翻转至扭簧达到临界值。
在门体30由G B1(G F)继续关闭的过程中，门体30在锁定力F S、勾挂部84弹性力与止挡部403的作用下继续关闭。翻转梁9在锁定力F S、翻转力F N以及导向槽14的槽壁的压力的共同作用下翻转到位。
以上本实施例中设置G B1＝G F，即门体30关闭至G B1(G F)时，勾挂部84弹性变形量达到最大变形量时，翻转梁9翻转至扭簧临界值，能够充分利用翻转力F N、锁定力F S的相互促进作用，以使门体30快速关闭到位，翻转梁9快速翻转到位，避免门体30关闭过程中，由于门体30向所述外侧运动抵消促使翻转梁9翻转的作用力而导致的翻转梁9不能有效翻转。
以上，在门体30关闭过程中，止挡部与锁定结构在门体30关闭达到G B1(G F)后，门体30在关闭过程中向所述外侧移动而导致翻转力F N不断衰减。另外，随着门体30关闭角度的减小，锁定力F S不断衰减。
在本实施例中，由于G B1＝G F，因此在翻转力F N和锁定力F S均为最大时，同步相互促进，充分扩大了锁定力F S促进翻转梁9的翻转的角度范围。
在本实施例中，在实施例一的轨迹槽的轨迹的限定下，当门体30关闭至G B1(G F)时，第一铰链轴41相对第一轨迹槽50位于第一接触定位点，第二铰链轴42相对第二轨迹槽60位于第一接触导向点。
第一接触定位点位于第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段上，且第一接触定位点、第一定位点P 1依次向远离门侧壁32的方向排列。第一接触导向点位于第二轨迹线K上，且第一接触导向点、第一导向点Q 1依次远离门侧壁32且靠近门前壁31的方向排列。
在本实施例中，可设置G S＝G B0，即当导向块13与导向槽14相接触时，勾挂部84与止挡部403相抵接。这样，在关门力F W的作用下，翻转梁9的扭簧与勾挂部同步开始变形积蓄弹性能，而后再相继释放弹性能，从而有效提高了扭簧与勾挂部运动的同步性，减少了门体30打开过程中，用户施加关闭力F W的时间，提高用户的使用体验。
实施例十一
本实施例十一与实施例一至实施例十的的设置相同，其区别在于：在本实施例中，如图58所示，门前壁31与门侧壁32所成夹角的角平分面记为角平分面H(即，参考角平分面)，第三参考平面M 3与基准平面M 0所成二面角记为第一夹角σ＝90°。当门体30关闭时，角平分面H平分第一夹角σ＝90°。
需要说明的是，第三参考平面M 3与基准平面M 0所成二面角的角平分面(保持不动的)为门体30关闭时门前壁31与门侧壁32所成夹角的角平分面H。即，门体30关闭时的角平分面H亦为第三参考平面M 3与基准平面M 0的夹角平分面。在门体30相对箱体10的打开过程中，角平分面H是随着门体30相对于箱体10运动的。
在本实施例中，门体30关闭时的第一侧棱W位于基准平面M 0上，即门体30关闭时的第一侧棱W为的第三参考平面M 3与基准平面M 0相交线。
参见图58至图60所示，门前壁31与门侧壁32所成的第一夹角σ＝90°。
当门体30关闭时，定位中心轴P位于第一轨迹线S的第一定位点P 1处。线段WP与第一轨迹线S上的直线轨段的夹角记为θ(例如，θ∈[0，π/2])。第一侧棱W与第一轨迹线S上的直线轨迹段所在直线的距离为R，R为定值。
当门体30以第一铰链轴41(定位中心轴P)为旋转轴旋转打开时，且当门体30旋转至WP与第二参考平面M 2相平行时，第一侧棱W与基准平面M 0的距离E最大，例如，E max＝R/sinθ-Rcotθ＝R(1/sinθ-cotθ)。在该过程中，门体30绕第一铰链轴41旋转的角度为θ。
其中，E max关于角度θ的一次导数如下：
E' max＝R[(1/sinθ)'-cot'θ]
＝R[-cosθ/sin 2θ+1/sin 2θ]
＝(R/sin 2θ)·(1-cosθ)＞0。
由此可知，E max＝R/sinθ-Rcotθ＝R(1/sinθ-cotθ)为关于θ的递增函数。
如图58所示，第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段与角平分面H的交点记为第二设置位A 2。第一轨迹线S上位于角平分面H靠近门侧壁32一侧的点记为第一设置位A 1。第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段上位于角平分面H远离门侧壁32一侧的点记为第三设置位A 3。WA 1与第一轨迹线的直线轨迹段的夹角记为θ 1，WA 2与第一轨迹线的直线轨迹段的夹角记为θ 2，WA 3与第一轨迹线的直线轨迹段的夹角记为θ 3；其中，θ 1＞θ 2＞θ 3。
由于E max＝R/sinθ-Rcotθ为关于θ的递增函数；则可知，E max(θ 1)＞E max(θ 2)＞E max(θ 3)。
综上，当第一定位点P 1在门体30关闭时，设置为位于第一设置位A 1处时，若门体30绕旋转轴(如第一铰链轴41)仅做旋转运动，则第一侧棱W在门体30旋转过程中，超出基准平面M 0的距离最大。
当第一定位点P 1在门体30关闭时，设置为位于第三设置位A 3处时，若门体30绕旋转轴(如第一铰链轴41)仅做旋转运动，则第一侧棱W在门体30旋转过程中，超出基准平面M 0的距离最小。
因此，为了实现将门体30嵌入橱柜100中使用，设置第一定位点P 1在门体30关闭时与门侧壁32的距离越大，门体30旋转的同时向所示内侧移动所需要的位移补偿量越小。
考虑到门体30旋转平移的稳定性，可以将第一铰链轴41设置于角平分面H上。
综上，在本实施例中，对于相对位置关系不变的第一轨迹槽50和第二轨迹槽60，门体30关闭时第一轨迹槽50的第一定位点P 1相对于角平分面H的位置不同，门体30旋转打开至90°时，门体30与第一参考平面M 1之间距离不同。
例如，随着设置的第一轨迹槽50的第一定位点P 1与门侧壁32的距离增大，门体30旋转打开至90°时，门体30与第一参考平面M 1之间距离越大，门体30可以打开的最大角度越大。
示例地，参见图9，当门体30打开至90°时，门前壁31与基准平面M 0之间的距离记为第一距离λ。其中，门前壁31位于基准平面M 0的内侧时，第一距离λ记为正数。
示例地，如图59所示，在第一定位点P 1在门体30关闭时，设置为位于第一设置位A 1处的情况下，当门体30打开至90°时，第一距离λ＝0，门前壁31与基准平面M 0相平齐。在本实施例中，|A 1A 2|∈(0，2]，单位：mm。这样，一方面可以确保定位中心轴P靠近角平分面H，以确保第一铰链轴41相对门体30运动的稳定性。另一方面，可以确保门体30打开至90°时不超出基准平面M 0，避免门体30与橱柜100干涉。
示例地，如图60所示，门体30关闭时，在第一定位点P 1在门体30关闭时，设置为位于第三设置位A 3处的情况下，当门体30打开至90°时，门前壁31位于基准平面M 0的所述内侧，第一距离λ＞0。例如，λ∈[0.5，2]，单位：mm。
在此情况下，门体30位于基准平面M 0的内侧，有利于嵌入橱柜100内的冰箱1的门体30可以打开至更大的角度。例如，|A 3A 2|∈(0，2]，单位：mm。这样，一方面可以确保定位中心轴P靠近角平分面H，以确保第一铰链轴41相对门体30运动的稳定性。另一方面，可以确保门体30打开90°时位于基准平面M 0内侧，有利于嵌入橱柜100内的冰箱1的门体30可以打开至更大的角度。
在本实施例中，门前壁31与第三参考平面M 3共面，门侧壁32与基准平面M 0共面。角平分面H亦为门前壁31与门侧壁32夹角的角平分面。当门体30仅绕第一铰链轴41旋转打开45°时，角平分面H与第三参考平面M 3相平行。当门体30打开至90°时，门前壁31与基准平面M 0相平行或共面。
例如，当门体30打开至45°附近时，第一铰链轴41移动至第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段的靠近门侧壁32的端部(即第三定位点P 3处)。例如，当第一铰链轴41移动至第一轨迹线S的直线轨迹段靠近门侧壁32的端部时，门体30打开角度为43°至47°中的任一角度。即在本实施例中，G 2∈[43°，47°]中的任一值。
本领域的技术人员将会理解，本发明的公开范围不限于上述具体实施例，并且可以在不脱离本申请的精神的情况下对实施例的某些要素进行修改和替换。本申请的范围受所附权利要求的限制。

Claims (20)

  1. 一种冰箱，包括：
    箱体，所述箱体包括相对设置的第一体侧壁和第二体侧壁；定义所述第一体侧壁所在的平面为基准平面，所述基准平面靠近所述箱体的一侧为内侧，所述基准平面远离所述箱体的一侧为外侧；
    铰链组件，所述铰链组件连接所述箱体，且靠近所述第一体侧壁；所述铰链组件包括：
    第一轨迹槽；
    第二轨迹槽；
    第一铰链轴，所述第一铰链轴与所述第一轨迹槽相配合，且相对所述第一轨迹槽可运动；和
    第二铰链轴；所述第二铰链轴与所述第二轨迹槽相配合，且相对所述第二轨迹槽可运动；以及
    门体，所述第一轨迹槽和所述第二轨迹槽设于所述门体靠近所述铰链组件的端部，且所述门体通过所述铰链组件连接所述箱体，以打开或关闭所述箱体；所述门体包括：
    门前壁，所述门前壁为所述门体的远离所述箱体一侧壁；和
    门侧壁，所述门侧壁为所述门体的靠近所述铰链组件的一侧壁；
    其中，当所述门体处于关闭状态时，所述第二铰链轴相较于所述第一铰链轴更远离所述门侧壁且更靠近所述门前壁；
    在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至第二角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴相对所述第一轨迹槽沿直线向靠近所述门侧壁的方向移动，且在所述门体打开至所述第二角度时改变运动方向；所述第二铰链轴向靠近所述门侧壁并远离所述门前壁的方向移动；
    在所述门体由所述第二角度打开至第五角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴沿所述第一轨迹槽向靠近所述门前壁且靠近所述门侧壁的方向运动，以使所述门体在旋转的过程中向所述内侧移动；
    其中，所述第五角度大于所述第二角度，且所述第二角度大于0°。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的冰箱，其中，在所述门体由所述第二角度打开至第四角度的过程中，所述第二铰链轴沿所述第二轨迹槽向靠近所述门侧壁且远离所述门前壁的方向运动；
    在所述门体由所述第四角度打开至所述第五角度的过程中，所述第二铰链轴沿所述第二轨迹槽向靠近所述门侧壁且靠近所述门前壁的方向运动；
    其中，所述第二角度小于所述第四角度，且所述第四角度小于所述第五角度；所述第四角度为88°至90°之间的任一值。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的冰箱，其中，在所述门体由所述第二角度打开至所述第五角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴在靠近所述门前壁的方向上的运动速率与所述第一铰链轴在靠近所述门侧壁的方向上的运动速率大致相等。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的冰箱，其中，当所述门体打开至所述第五角度时，所述第一铰链轴与所述第一轨迹槽的靠近所述门侧壁的端部相接触，所述第二铰链轴与所述第二轨迹槽的靠近所述门侧壁的端部相接触。
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的冰箱，其中，当所述门体打开至所述第五角度时，所述第一铰链轴与所述第一轨迹槽的靠近所述门侧壁的端部相接触，所述第二铰链轴与所述第二轨迹槽的靠近所述门侧壁的端部之间具有间隙。
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的冰箱，其中，在所述门体由所述第二角度打开至所述第五角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴相对所述门体运动的轨迹线为曲线轨迹段；所述曲线轨迹段向靠近所述门侧壁且靠近所述门前壁的方向延伸，且朝向靠近所述门侧壁且远离所述门前壁的方向凸出。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的冰箱，其中，在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至所述第二角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴相对所述门体运动的轨迹线为直线轨迹段；所述直线轨迹段连接所述曲线轨迹段，且位于所述曲线轨迹段的远离所述门侧壁的一侧；所述直线轨迹段平行于所述门前壁。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的冰箱，其中，所述曲线轨迹段为圆弧，且所述直线轨迹段与所述曲线轨迹段相切。
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的冰箱，其中，所述第二轨迹槽为曲线槽；所述第一轨迹槽包括：
    直线槽段；和
    曲线槽段，所述曲线槽段与所述直线槽段连通；
    其中，在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至所述第二角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴沿所述直线槽段向靠近所述门侧壁的方向移动；当所述门体打开至所述第二角度时，所述第一铰链轴移动至所述直线槽与所述曲线槽段的连接处；
    在所述门体由所述第二角度打开至所述第五角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴沿所述曲线槽段向靠近所述门前壁且靠近所述门侧壁的方向运动。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的冰箱，其中，所述直线槽段平行于所述门前壁。
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的冰箱，其中，在所述门体打开的过程中，所述第一铰链轴相对所述第一轨迹槽的运动方向为第一位移方向，所述第二铰链轴相对所述第二轨迹槽的运动方向记为第二位移方向；所述第一位移方向与所述第二位移方向的夹角为位移夹角；
    其中，在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至90°的过程中，所述位移夹角保持不变或在预设的范围内变化。
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的冰箱，其中，在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至所述第五角度的过程中，所述第一铰链轴相对所述第一轨迹槽始终运动，且所述第二铰链轴相对所述第二轨迹槽始终运动。
  13. 根据权利要求1至12中任一项所述的冰箱，其中，当所述门体打开至90°时，所述第一铰链轴相对所述第一轨迹槽的位置，相较于所述门体处于所述关闭状态时，所述第一铰链轴相对所述第一轨迹槽的位置更靠近所述门侧壁。
  14. 根据权利要求1至13中任一项所述的冰箱，其中，所述箱体还包括储藏室，所述储藏室朝向所述门体的一侧敞开以限定出取放口；
    所述门体还包括：
    门后壁，所述门后壁为所述门体的靠近所述箱体的一侧壁；和
    门封条，所述门封条设置在所述门后壁上；当所述门体处于所述关闭状态时，所述门封条与所述箱体抵接，以封堵所述门体与所述箱体之间的间隙。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的冰箱，其中，所述门封条包括侧封棱，所述侧封棱为所述门封条的靠近所述门侧壁且远离所述门前壁的一条侧棱；
    定义第一参考平面位于所述基准平面的所述外侧，平行于所述基准平面，且与所述基准平面间隔开一定距离；
    定义所述取放口所在平面为第二参考平面，所述第一参考平面垂直于所述第二参考平面；
    在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至90°的过程中，所述侧封棱向远离所述第一参考平面且远离所述第二参考平面的方向运动；
    在所述门体由90°打开至所述第五角度的过程中，所述侧封棱向靠近所述第一参考平面且远离所述第二参考平面的方向运动。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的冰箱，其中，在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至所述第五角度的过程中，所述侧封棱的运动轨迹近似为圆弧。
  17. 根据权利要求15所述的冰箱，其中，所述门体还包括：
    第一侧棱，所述门前壁与所述门侧壁交汇形成所述第一侧棱；和
    第二侧棱，所述门后壁与所述门侧壁交汇形成所述第二侧棱；
    在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至所述第二角度的过程中，所述第一侧棱向靠近所述第一参考平面且靠近所述第二参考平面的方向沿曲线运动；所述第二侧棱向远离所述第一参考平面且靠近所述第二参考平面的方向沿曲线运动；
    在所述门体由所述第二角度打开至所述第五角度的过程中，所述第一侧棱向远离所述第一参考平面且靠近所述第二参考平面的方向沿曲线运动；所述第二侧棱远离所述第一参考平面且远离所述第二参考平面的方向沿曲线运动。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的冰箱，其中，
    在所述门体由所述关闭状态打开至所述第二角度的过程中，所述第一侧棱的运动方向与所述第一参考平面所形成的第一方向夹角呈减小趋势，所述第二侧棱的运动方向与所述第二参考平面所形成的第二方向夹角呈减小趋势；
    在所述门体由所述第二角度打开至所述第五角度的过程中，所述第一侧棱的运动方向与所述第一参考平面所形成的第三方向夹角呈增大趋势；所述第二侧棱的运动方向与所述第二参考平面所形成的第四方向夹角亦呈增大趋势。
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的冰箱，其中，在所述门体由90°打开至所述第五角度的过程中，所述第二侧棱位于相较于所述侧封棱更靠近所述基准平面。
  20. 根据权利要求1至19中任一项所述的冰箱，其中，定义所述门前壁与所述门侧壁所成二面角的角平分面为参考角平分面；
    当所述门体处于所述关闭状态时，所述第一铰链轴的中心轴位于所述参考角平分面的靠近所述门侧壁的一侧，且当所述门体打开至90°时，所述门前壁大致位于所述基准平面中；
    或者，
    当所述门体处于所述关闭状态时，所述第一铰链轴的所述中心轴位于所述参考角平分面的远离所述门侧壁的一侧，且当所述门体打开至90°时，所述门前壁位于所述基准平面的所述内侧。
PCT/CN2022/129650 2021-09-18 2022-11-03 冰箱 WO2024000983A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111098814 2021-09-18
CN202111104648 2021-09-18
CN202210757115.XA CN115143705A (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-06-30 冰箱
CN202210756773.7A CN115143700A (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-06-30 冰箱
CN202210757115.X 2022-06-30
CN202210756773.7 2022-06-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024000983A1 true WO2024000983A1 (zh) 2024-01-04

Family

ID=82508520

Family Applications (10)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/101634 WO2023071251A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-06-27 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/101652 WO2023071253A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-06-27 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/101650 WO2023071252A1 (zh) 2021-07-26 2022-06-27 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/102492 WO2023123950A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-06-29 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/118562 WO2023040854A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-09-13 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/118564 WO2023040855A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-09-13 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/119674 WO2023206934A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-09-19 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/129649 WO2024000982A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-11-03 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/129650 WO2024000983A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-11-03 冰箱
PCT/CN2023/070699 WO2023197702A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2023-01-05 冰箱

Family Applications Before (8)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/101634 WO2023071251A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-06-27 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/101652 WO2023071253A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-06-27 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/101650 WO2023071252A1 (zh) 2021-07-26 2022-06-27 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/102492 WO2023123950A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-06-29 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/118562 WO2023040854A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-09-13 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/118564 WO2023040855A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-09-13 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/119674 WO2023206934A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-09-19 冰箱
PCT/CN2022/129649 WO2024000982A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2022-11-03 冰箱

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/070699 WO2023197702A1 (zh) 2021-09-18 2023-01-05 冰箱

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20240219106A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4403855A1 (zh)
JP (1) JP2024531700A (zh)
CN (74) CN115839588A (zh)
WO (10) WO2023071251A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115839588A (zh) * 2021-09-18 2023-03-24 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN115371332B (zh) * 2022-08-31 2023-08-11 海信冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN115371333B (zh) * 2022-08-31 2023-11-24 海信冰箱有限公司 冰箱
WO2024193592A1 (zh) * 2023-03-21 2024-09-26 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 储物组件及具有其的冰箱
WO2024193658A1 (zh) * 2023-03-21 2024-09-26 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 置物装置
WO2024193594A1 (zh) * 2023-03-21 2024-09-26 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 储物组件及具有其的冰箱
WO2024193657A1 (zh) * 2023-03-21 2024-09-26 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 置物装置
WO2024193659A1 (zh) * 2023-03-21 2024-09-26 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 置物装置及冰箱
CN116358235B (zh) * 2023-03-31 2024-09-03 海信冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN116294394B (zh) * 2023-05-22 2023-08-04 合肥高科科技股份有限公司 一种冰箱门转动轴心可变的冰箱

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120025686A1 (en) * 2006-06-22 2012-02-02 Ian Darney Domestic Appliance with Concealed Hinge
EP2869007A2 (en) * 2013-11-01 2015-05-06 LG Electronics Inc. Refrigerator
CN215983419U (zh) * 2021-02-09 2022-03-08 广东美的白色家电技术创新中心有限公司 箱体组件及制冷设备
CN115143700A (zh) * 2021-09-18 2022-10-04 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 冰箱

Family Cites Families (152)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB290200A (en) * 1927-05-09 1928-08-09 Budd Edward G Mfg Co Improvements in dust-proof hinge
US3083403A (en) * 1959-04-23 1963-04-02 Jervis Corp Hidden hinge structure
IT1016871B (it) * 1974-08-23 1977-06-20 Saseb Ag Cerniera per porte di autoveicoli atta a trattenere la porta sia in posizione parzialmente aperta sia in posizione totalmente aperta
US4158902A (en) * 1977-09-30 1979-06-26 Chernack Milton P Integral snap action hinge
JPS5945480U (ja) * 1982-09-20 1984-03-26 株式会社東芝 貯蔵庫の扉枢支装置
JP3112786B2 (ja) * 1993-09-13 2000-11-27 株式会社太田製作所 スライド蝶番
DE19500139C2 (de) * 1995-01-04 1997-04-10 Lahrmann Eva Kurvenlager für Türen, Fenster, Klappen oder dergleichen
KR100286928B1 (ko) * 1998-06-29 2001-04-16 이마이 가쓰야 힌지
KR100281961B1 (ko) * 1998-11-28 2001-02-15 전주범 냉장고의 도어 개방장치
JP2000240346A (ja) * 1999-02-22 2000-09-05 Nissan Motor Co Ltd ドア開閉構造
DE19930328C1 (de) * 1999-07-02 2000-10-26 Edscha Ag Türanlenkung
KR200169564Y1 (ko) * 1999-09-06 2000-02-15 삼성전자주식회사 냉장고의 도어 힌지장치
JP3597424B2 (ja) * 1999-10-25 2004-12-08 シャープ株式会社 ドア開閉機構
KR100390781B1 (ko) * 2000-12-30 2003-07-10 주식회사 엘지이아이 냉장고 도어용 고정 장치
US6493906B2 (en) * 2001-02-02 2002-12-17 Charles Matteau Hinge structure
KR100443983B1 (ko) * 2002-01-15 2004-08-09 삼성전자주식회사 냉장고
JP2004169987A (ja) * 2002-11-20 2004-06-17 Hitachi Home & Life Solutions Inc 冷蔵庫
JP2004293913A (ja) * 2003-03-26 2004-10-21 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd 冷蔵庫
KR200362124Y1 (ko) * 2004-04-16 2004-09-16 에스엔씨메탈 주식회사 도어 릴리스
KR20050111094A (ko) * 2004-05-21 2005-11-24 삼성전자주식회사 냉장고
KR20060000340A (ko) * 2004-06-28 2006-01-06 삼성전자주식회사 냉장고
KR20060075639A (ko) * 2004-12-28 2006-07-04 엘지전자 주식회사 냉장고의 도어개폐장치
DE102005004957B4 (de) * 2005-02-02 2013-05-08 Hettich-Oni Gmbh & Co. Kg Mehrgelenkscharnier
KR100686097B1 (ko) * 2005-04-14 2007-02-26 엘지전자 주식회사 냉장고의 도어 어셈블리와 이를 이용한 냉장고
KR101198181B1 (ko) * 2005-05-16 2012-11-12 피케이텍시스템 주식회사 저장고용 힌지장치 및 이를 갖춘 저장고
DE102005039509B3 (de) * 2005-08-20 2006-06-22 Simonswerk, Gmbh Türband für eine verdeckte Anordnung zwischen Türzarge und Türflügel
KR100717476B1 (ko) * 2005-10-13 2007-05-14 엘지전자 주식회사 김치냉장고용 힌지장치
KR100748969B1 (ko) * 2005-10-25 2007-08-13 엘지전자 주식회사 냉장고의 도어 개폐 장치
DE102005057133A1 (de) * 2005-11-30 2007-06-06 BSH Bosch und Siemens Hausgeräte GmbH Haushaltsgerät mit klemmgeschützter Tür
KR200411572Y1 (ko) * 2006-01-06 2006-03-15 이학서 문과 그 문이 설치되는 문틀
CN101086409B (zh) * 2006-06-06 2011-02-02 海尔集团公司 旋转式冰箱小门
JP4192188B2 (ja) * 2006-06-14 2008-12-03 杉田エース株式会社 蝶番
CN101153529B (zh) * 2006-09-30 2012-02-29 海尔集团公司 冷柜门铰链结构
JP4247278B2 (ja) * 2007-02-09 2009-04-02 日立アプライアンス株式会社 冷蔵庫
DE102007058594A1 (de) * 2007-12-04 2009-06-10 Nilsson, Rickard Tür-Arretierungsvorrichtung insbesondere für Isolierglastüren von Kühlräumen und Kühlmöbel bzw. Kühlschränke
CN101235692A (zh) * 2007-12-21 2008-08-06 海信科龙电器股份有限公司 一种门铰链装置
DE102008018009A1 (de) * 2008-04-09 2009-10-15 BSH Bosch und Siemens Hausgeräte GmbH Haushaltskühlgerät
DE102008021344A1 (de) * 2008-04-29 2009-11-05 BSH Bosch und Siemens Hausgeräte GmbH Haushaltsgerät
CN101464082A (zh) * 2009-01-06 2009-06-24 青岛澳柯玛股份有限公司 一种具有便携式多媒体终端的冰箱
CN101598480A (zh) * 2009-06-30 2009-12-09 海信科龙电器股份有限公司 一种立式风冷冷柜结构
AT12310U1 (de) * 2010-09-16 2012-03-15 Red Bull Gmbh Kühlvorrichtung mit integriertem flaschensumpf
KR101785343B1 (ko) * 2010-08-11 2017-10-17 삼성전자주식회사 냉장고
CN102062510B (zh) * 2011-01-25 2013-03-13 海信容声(广东)冰箱有限公司 一种嵌入式冰箱门铰链
CN102128538B (zh) * 2011-04-07 2012-10-03 合肥美的荣事达电冰箱有限公司 用于旋转式门体的闭门装置和具有其的冰箱
WO2012159259A1 (zh) * 2011-05-23 2012-11-29 合肥美的荣事达电冰箱有限公司 用于旋转式箱门的闭门结构和具有该闭门结构的对开门冰箱
CN102502125B (zh) * 2011-10-24 2013-12-25 上海鸿研物流技术有限公司 可弹性限位的铰链及采用该铰链的运输贮存容器
CN102384626A (zh) * 2011-11-16 2012-03-21 海信容声(广东)冰箱有限公司 一种冰箱门体调节结构
US9254705B2 (en) * 2012-02-24 2016-02-09 Deli Group Co, Ltd. Ring binder having attachable and detachable covers
CN102735014B (zh) * 2012-05-29 2014-03-26 海信容声(广东)冰箱有限公司 一种冰箱门体调节装置及设有调节装置的冰箱
CH704557B1 (de) * 2012-06-08 2021-09-30 V Zug Ag Kühlgerät mit Unterdruckbehälter.
JP6148828B2 (ja) * 2012-07-04 2017-06-14 シャープ株式会社 冷蔵庫
CN103292540B (zh) * 2013-05-20 2015-09-02 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 冰箱
KR102245368B1 (ko) * 2013-06-14 2021-04-28 엘지전자 주식회사 냉장고
JP6236235B2 (ja) * 2013-07-04 2017-11-22 ホシザキ株式会社 貯蔵庫の扉開閉構造
CN103410396B (zh) * 2013-07-26 2016-12-07 合肥晶弘电器有限公司 一种冰箱闭门器
KR102193778B1 (ko) * 2013-10-17 2020-12-23 삼성전자주식회사 냉장고
JP2015135228A (ja) * 2013-10-17 2015-07-27 三星電子株式会社Ｓａｍｓｕｎｇ Ｅｌｅｃｔｒｏｎｉｃｓ Ｃｏ．，Ｌｔｄ． ヒンジ装置、及び該ヒンジ装置を備えた冷却貯蔵庫
KR20150045619A (ko) * 2013-10-21 2015-04-29 주식회사 대유위니아 냉장고
CN103743190B (zh) * 2013-12-31 2016-06-22 合肥晶弘电器有限公司 一种可左右双向开关门冰箱
KR20150120802A (ko) * 2014-04-18 2015-10-28 주식회사 대유위니아 냉장고
CN104295174A (zh) * 2014-09-30 2015-01-21 青岛海尔股份有限公司 门体止挡结构及具有该门体止挡结构的冰箱
KR101691260B1 (ko) * 2014-10-17 2016-12-29 엘지전자 주식회사 냉장고
KR102100252B1 (ko) * 2015-01-05 2020-04-13 삼성전자주식회사 냉장고
CN105115221B (zh) * 2015-07-23 2018-09-04 合肥美的电冰箱有限公司 铰链盖及冰箱
CN106568283B (zh) * 2015-10-10 2021-05-04 博西华电器（江苏）有限公司 冰箱
JP6687920B2 (ja) * 2015-11-12 2020-04-28 株式会社シブタニ 二軸ヒンジ、およびその二軸ヒンジを備えた止水扉、並びに二軸ヒンジを用いた扉の取り付け方法
KR102391404B1 (ko) * 2015-12-17 2022-04-27 엘지전자 주식회사 냉장고
KR102550258B1 (ko) * 2016-01-05 2023-07-03 엘지전자 주식회사 냉장고
KR102567513B1 (ko) * 2016-06-08 2023-08-17 삼성전자주식회사 냉장고
CN106196856B (zh) * 2016-07-05 2019-02-19 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 一种门体磁敏开关的安装结构
CN106196819A (zh) * 2016-08-05 2016-12-07 青岛海尔股份有限公司 冰箱
WO2018075094A1 (en) * 2016-10-17 2018-04-26 Whirlpool Corporation Hinge assembly
CN206291604U (zh) * 2016-11-16 2017-06-30 青岛海尔股份有限公司 冰箱
CN106839613B (zh) * 2016-11-16 2023-04-14 海尔智家股份有限公司 冰箱
CN106595201A (zh) * 2016-12-09 2017-04-26 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 一种对开门冰箱
CN206420221U (zh) * 2016-12-30 2017-08-18 广东格兰仕集团有限公司 冰箱门体的闭门和限位功能整合结构
CN106766596A (zh) * 2016-12-30 2017-05-31 广东格兰仕集团有限公司 冰箱的翻转梁轨道
CN106839619B (zh) * 2017-01-04 2019-03-12 合肥华凌股份有限公司 冰箱的门体组件及冰箱
CN206418899U (zh) * 2017-01-13 2017-08-18 中山市维诺电器有限公司 一种酒柜或冷柜的门铰结构
CN206514595U (zh) * 2017-01-22 2017-09-22 深圳市绿鑫源农品有限公司 一种冷库
KR101972785B1 (ko) * 2017-03-29 2019-04-25 엘지전자 주식회사 냉장고
CN106869656A (zh) * 2017-04-10 2017-06-20 广东星徽精密科技有限公司 一种改良的冰箱铰链
CN107165518B (zh) * 2017-07-01 2019-05-03 青岛海尔股份有限公司 铰链组件及具有该铰链组件的冰箱
CN207048541U (zh) * 2017-07-28 2018-02-27 边中强 一种双轴开门铰链及储物箱
CN107630610B (zh) * 2017-09-01 2019-08-02 青岛海尔股份有限公司 一种铰链组件及包括其的冰箱
CN107726716B (zh) * 2017-11-09 2020-10-30 合肥雪祺电气有限公司 用于实现冰箱门体90°开门的门体设计方法
CN108104636B (zh) * 2017-12-12 2021-03-23 海尔智家股份有限公司 嵌入式铰链装置
CN108302856B (zh) * 2017-12-12 2020-09-29 青岛海尔股份有限公司 冰箱
CN108278841B (zh) * 2017-12-12 2020-07-28 青岛海尔股份有限公司 冰箱
CN108286860B (zh) * 2017-12-12 2020-09-29 青岛海尔股份有限公司 冰箱
JP6876011B2 (ja) * 2018-02-09 2021-05-26 日立グローバルライフソリューションズ株式会社 冷蔵庫
CN109695391A (zh) * 2018-04-24 2019-04-30 青岛海尔股份有限公司 闭门器及具有该闭门器的冰箱
CN208294312U (zh) * 2018-05-10 2018-12-28 潘峥毅 可打开180度的暗门
CN110700713B (zh) * 2018-07-09 2021-03-23 海尔智家股份有限公司 一种用于冰箱的门体铰链装置及冰箱
CN110700712B (zh) * 2018-07-09 2021-03-23 海尔智家股份有限公司 一种用于冰箱的门体铰链装置及冰箱
CN110952859B (zh) * 2018-09-27 2023-07-28 青岛海尔特种电冰柜有限公司 一种带凸轮的铰链结构及制冷设备
US10828586B2 (en) * 2018-10-26 2020-11-10 Haier Us Appliance Solutions, Inc. Filter assembly for a refrigerator appliance
CN111691775A (zh) * 2019-03-12 2020-09-22 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 用于冰箱的轴套装置及冰箱
EP3741942A1 (en) * 2019-05-20 2020-11-25 Whirlpool Corporation Refrigerator with hinge assembly
CN112012604A (zh) * 2019-05-31 2020-12-01 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 用于冰箱的铰链装置及冰箱
CN112282539B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2022-10-04 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有挡板的冰箱
CN112282549B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2022-07-15 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有关门抓紧结构的冰箱
CN116427805A (zh) * 2019-07-23 2023-07-14 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及具有其的冰箱
CN112282541B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2022-07-26 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有异形板的冰箱
CN112282540B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2022-06-24 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有活动板的冰箱
CN112282543B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2022-07-12 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN112304007A (zh) * 2019-07-23 2021-02-02 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有开门止挡结构的冰箱
CN112304008B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2022-05-20 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 对开门冰箱
CN112282545B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2022-05-20 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN114857847B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2023-10-24 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及具有其的制冷设备
CN112282546B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2022-10-04 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有挡板的铰链组件及具有其的冰箱
CN112282542B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2022-10-28 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有装饰片的冰箱
CN115045579B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2023-11-14 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及具有其的制冷电器
CN115126367B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2023-11-07 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及具有其的冰箱
CN115992631A (zh) * 2019-08-28 2023-04-21 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及具有其的制冷装置
CN114876300B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2023-11-14 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及具有其的制冷装置
CN112444091B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-03-25 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 可辅助开门的嵌入式冰箱
NZ785708A (en) * 2019-08-28 2024-07-26 Qingdao haier refrigerator co ltd Free built-in refrigerator capable of increasing degree of opening
CN112444082B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-03-25 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 可增加开度的对开门冰箱
CN112444030B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-11-08 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有走线模块的冰箱
CN112444070B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-05-20 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 可辅助开门的多门冰箱
CN112444086B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2021-10-29 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有多轴铰链组件的嵌入式冰箱
EP4023964A4 (en) * 2019-08-28 2023-02-22 Qingdao Haier Refrigerator Co., Ltd EMBEDDED REFRIGERATOR THAT MAKES THE DOOR EASIER TO OPEN
CN112444074A (zh) * 2019-08-28 2021-03-05 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 可实现重心内移的嵌入式冰箱
CN112444057B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-02-22 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 可实现重心内移的多门冰箱
CN114876299B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2023-11-14 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及具有其的制冷设备
CN115012753B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2023-11-14 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及具有其的制冷器具
CN112444067B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-08-12 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有可切换铰链组件的冰箱
CN112444080B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-02-22 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 可增加开度的多门冰箱
US12038226B2 (en) * 2019-08-28 2024-07-16 Qingdao Haier Refrigerator Co., Ltd. Free embedded refrigerator
CN112444062B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-04-29 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 可增加开度的冰箱
CN114837506B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2023-10-24 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及具有其的器具
CN112444077B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-02-22 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 可实现重心内移的冰箱
CN112444059B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-03-25 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 可辅助开门的对开门冰箱
CN112444068B (zh) * 2019-08-28 2022-04-29 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 嵌入式对开门冰箱
WO2021037119A1 (zh) * 2019-08-28 2021-03-04 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 带有切换组件的嵌入式冰箱
CN110541640A (zh) * 2019-09-11 2019-12-06 宁波市维特建筑五金有限公司 一种可擦窗铰链
CN110700711B (zh) * 2019-10-15 2021-11-05 海信容声(广东)冷柜有限公司 一种冷柜
WO2021114956A1 (zh) * 2019-12-12 2021-06-17 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN111155859A (zh) * 2020-01-16 2020-05-15 江苏星徽精密科技有限公司 一种防撞限位的嵌入式冰箱铰链组件
WO2021177476A1 (ko) * 2020-03-02 2021-09-10 엘지전자 주식회사 냉장고
CN113639506B (zh) * 2020-05-11 2022-05-06 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN111456578A (zh) * 2020-05-26 2020-07-28 希美克(广州)实业有限公司 一种方便安装的间隙可调的铰链
CN111734244A (zh) * 2020-06-22 2020-10-02 长虹美菱股份有限公司 一种冰箱门开合限位铰链组件
CN111765691A (zh) * 2020-07-01 2020-10-13 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN213330533U (zh) * 2020-07-24 2021-06-01 佛山市瀚智建筑五金有限公司 一种重型抗风压防尘防坠的三角型安全结构窗用铰链
CN213477969U (zh) * 2020-08-19 2021-06-18 合肥美的电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及储物柜
CN212378331U (zh) * 2020-09-15 2021-01-19 沈阳海尔电冰箱有限公司 冰箱
KR102223369B1 (ko) * 2020-09-24 2021-03-04 김순종 냉동창고 및 냉동고 도어용 힌지
DE102020125600B3 (de) * 2020-09-30 2021-09-02 Hettich-Oni Gmbh & Co. Kg Kühlschrank
CN112378142A (zh) * 2020-11-13 2021-02-19 海信容声(广东)冰箱有限公司 一种冰箱
CN112595011B (zh) * 2020-12-15 2023-04-18 海信冰箱有限公司 冰箱

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120025686A1 (en) * 2006-06-22 2012-02-02 Ian Darney Domestic Appliance with Concealed Hinge
EP2869007A2 (en) * 2013-11-01 2015-05-06 LG Electronics Inc. Refrigerator
CN215983419U (zh) * 2021-02-09 2022-03-08 广东美的白色家电技术创新中心有限公司 箱体组件及制冷设备
CN115143700A (zh) * 2021-09-18 2022-10-04 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN115143696A (zh) * 2021-09-18 2022-10-04 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN115143701A (zh) * 2021-09-18 2022-10-04 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 冰箱
CN115143705A (zh) * 2021-09-18 2022-10-04 海信（山东）冰箱有限公司 冰箱

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115289757B (zh) 2024-01-05
CN115143695A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115615099A (zh) 2023-01-17
CN115143704A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115839582A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN115307366A (zh) 2022-11-08
CN118235005A (zh) 2024-06-21
CN114812077A (zh) 2022-07-29
CN114812075A (zh) 2022-07-29
CN115823803A (zh) 2023-03-21
CN115839584A (zh) 2023-03-24
WO2023071252A1 (zh) 2023-05-04
CN115839585A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN115307368B (zh) 2024-01-19
CN115839571A (zh) 2023-03-24
WO2023206934A1 (zh) 2023-11-02
CN115143691B (zh) 2024-04-05
WO2023071253A1 (zh) 2023-05-04
CN115143688B (zh) 2024-05-31
CN115143705A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115839573A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN115839587A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN115143693A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115143699B (zh) 2024-08-02
CN114877602A (zh) 2022-08-09
CN115143697A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115289758A (zh) 2022-11-04
CN115615100A (zh) 2023-01-17
CN114812078A (zh) 2022-07-29
CN114963663B (zh) 2024-09-17
CN115143701A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115289755B (zh) 2023-08-25
CN115307361A (zh) 2022-11-08
WO2023123950A1 (zh) 2023-07-06
CN115839586A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN114812079A (zh) 2022-07-29
CN115143695B (zh) 2024-08-27
CN115839580A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN115307366B (zh) 2023-09-26
CN115289757A (zh) 2022-11-04
CN115143700A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115289755A (zh) 2022-11-04
CN114963662B (zh) 2024-09-13
CN114963667A (zh) 2022-08-30
CN114812081A (zh) 2022-07-29
CN115031477A (zh) 2022-09-09
CN115289758B (zh) 2023-09-26
CN114963663A (zh) 2022-08-30
CN115823798A (zh) 2023-03-21
WO2023040854A1 (zh) 2023-03-23
CN115143694A (zh) 2022-10-04
WO2023071251A1 (zh) 2023-05-04
CN115143698A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115143697B (zh) 2024-06-04
CN115307363B (zh) 2024-01-26
CN115307367B (zh) 2024-02-06
CN115031477B (zh) 2023-09-19
CN115289754B (zh) 2023-08-18
CN115143706A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115143690A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN114812077B (zh) 2024-09-24
CN114963665A (zh) 2022-08-30
CN114877603A (zh) 2022-08-09
CN115307368A (zh) 2022-11-08
CN115307367A (zh) 2022-11-08
CN115307362A (zh) 2022-11-08
CN115307365A (zh) 2022-11-08
CN115839568A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN115143702A (zh) 2022-10-04
WO2023197702A1 (zh) 2023-10-19
CN115143688A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN114963666A (zh) 2022-08-30
WO2024000982A1 (zh) 2024-01-04
CN114812080A (zh) 2022-07-29
CN115839581A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN114877602B (zh) 2024-05-14
CN115143691A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115307364B (zh) 2024-02-06
CN115307361B (zh) 2023-07-21
CN115289756A (zh) 2022-11-04
CN115839583A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN221223106U (zh) 2024-06-25
CN114812080B (zh) 2024-09-03
CN115307362B (zh) 2023-07-21
CN115523710A (zh) 2022-12-27
CN115839588A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN115839569A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN115289754A (zh) 2022-11-04
US20240219106A1 (en) 2024-07-04
CN114812075B (zh) 2024-09-20
CN115143703A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115143699A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115307363A (zh) 2022-11-08
CN115307364A (zh) 2022-11-08
CN115143689A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115143696A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115143701B (zh) 2024-08-02
CN114812082A (zh) 2022-07-29
CN115143690B (zh) 2024-10-11
CN114812073A (zh) 2022-07-29
CN114963664A (zh) 2022-08-30
CN115143689B (zh) 2024-05-10
CN115839572A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN114812074A (zh) 2022-07-29
CN115143693B (zh) 2024-08-02
EP4403855A1 (en) 2024-07-24
CN114812076A (zh) 2022-07-29
CN114812078B (zh) 2024-10-08
CN114877603B (zh) 2024-09-20
CN115143692A (zh) 2022-10-04
CN115839570A (zh) 2023-03-24
CN221223107U (zh) 2024-06-25
CN115143692B (zh) 2024-10-11
CN115307365B (zh) 2024-01-19
CN114963667B (zh) 2024-05-14
CN115289756B (zh) 2023-11-24
CN114963662A (zh) 2022-08-30
JP2024531700A (ja) 2024-08-29
WO2023040855A1 (zh) 2023-03-23
CN115143696B (zh) 2024-09-20
CN114812073B (zh) 2024-09-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2024000983A1 (zh) 冰箱
WO2023124619A1 (zh) 冰箱
CN117190607A (zh) 冰箱
CN117190595A (zh) 冰箱

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22949066

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1